HONORARY CHAIRPERSON

Prof. Dr. Hüseyin AKAN

CHAIRPERSON

Prof. Dr. Zeki KARAKAYA

VICE CHAIRPERSON

Inst. Yasemin KÜTÜK

ORGANIZING COMMITTEE

Inst. Tuba ODABAŞ

Inst. Aydan ERMİŞ
Inst. Işıl ATLI
Inst. Emrah EKMEKÇİ
Inst. Salih KILIÇ
Inst. Gregory Thomas SULLIVAN
Inst. İlker CENDER
Inst. Dalga ÖZAL
Inst. Elif GÜVENDİ YALÇIN
Inst. Betül ÖZCAN
Inst. İsmail YAMAN
Inst. Neslihan ACAR
Lect. Ferit BERÇİN
Res. Assist. Adnan OFLAZ

2
 ADVISORY BOARD

Prof. Dr. Abdulvahit ÇAKIR, Gazi University

Prof. Dr. İbrahim YEREBAKAN, Recep Tayyip Erdoğan University
Prof. Dr. Hatice SOFU, Çukurova University
Prof. Dr. Kamil AYDIN, Atatürk University
Prof. Dr. Mehmet DEMİREZEN, Hacettepe University
Prof. Dr. Mehmet TAKKAÇ, Atatürk University
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Ali GÜNEŞ, Karabük University
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Arif SARIÇOBAN, Hacettepe University
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Nalan KIZILTAN, Ondokuz Mayıs University
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Paşa Tevfik CEPHE, Gazi University
Assist. Prof. Dr. Dilek ÇAKICI, Ondokuz Mayıs University
Assist. Prof. Dr. Doğan BULUT, Melikşah University
Assist. Prof. Dr. İrfan TOSUNCUOĞLU, Karabük University
Assist. Prof. Dr. M. Naci KAYAOĞLU, Karadeniz Technical University
Assist. Prof. Dr. Muzaffer BARIN, Atatürk University
Assist. Prof. Dr. Yusuf ŞEN, Düzce University
Assist. Prof. Dr. Zerrin EREN, Ondokuz Mayıs University
Dr. Deniz KURTOĞLU EKEN, Sabancı University
Mehmet ATASAGUN, Bahçeşehir University

EDITED BY
Inst. Emrah EKMEKÇİ
Inst. Işıl ATLI
Inst. İsmail YAMAN

3
 Dear Colleagues,

We are pleased to publish a selection of diverse papers from the 3rd Black Sea ELT

Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning” organized by Ondokuz Mayıs

University School of Foreign Languages on 15-17 December, 2012. We hope that the

conference, with its full program of plenary talks, workshops, oral presentations and poster

presentations was inspiring, informative and enlightening for everyone. In this book of

proceedings, we present a variety of research papers that reflect the changing winds and

shifting sands in foreign language teaching with the integration and application of different

kinds of technology to language teaching.

The nature of educational paradigms as ever changing is particularly true in the field

of foreign and second language teaching. The traditional understanding of teaching and

learning, student-teacher roles and educational materials has changed to a considerable extent

with the profound influence of new developments in technology. It is now widely established

that the use of technology is an indispensable part of the language teaching process for all

skills and settings. Technology helps learners internalize their acquired knowledge, making

them more autonomous, which encourages mutual interaction and communication and
facilitates direct feedback. It also results in communicative and collaborative learning as well

as motivation for both learners and teachers.

Our book of proceedings aims to bring together a variety of research papers presented

in the conference, creating a resource for researchers and teachers in the field of language

teaching. I would like to express my greatest thanks to all presenters and participants for

sharing their valuable work and experience. I would also like to recognize the conference

organizing committee of the conference for their dedication and hard work. To our sponsors, I

extend our deepest gratitude to our sponsors for their constant support.

Prof. Dr. Zeki KARAKAYA

Director of School of Foreign Languages

 TABLE OF CONTENTS
The Use Of Flipped Classroom In Foreign Language Teaching ........................................................................................... 8
Ahmet BAŞAL

Grammar Lessons with the Flipped Classroom Method .................................................................................................... 13

Alessandra NICOLOSI

Using Video-Recording Method in Listening and Speaking Classes .................................................................................. 18

Betul Ayse SAYIN

Poetry as an Integrative and Supplementary Teaching Resource ........................................................................................ 26

Dalga ÖZAL & Zerrin EREN

Language Learning Strategies Used By Prospective Teachers at English and German Language Teaching Departments
............................................................................................................................................................................................. 37
Dilek ÇAKICI & Adnan OFLAZ

Professional Self-Esteem as A Predictor of Teacher Burnout across Iranian and Turkish Efl Teachers ............................ 50
Ebrahim KHEZERLOU

Reader Response Theory and Its Reflections in A Reading Class ....................................................................................... 59

Emrah EKMEKÇİ & Ömer ŞEKERCİ

A Case Study: Attitudes of Esp Students Towards Call ...................................................................................................... 69

Esra ERDOĞAN & Özge KUTLU

Learning Styles and Strategies of Effective and Less Effective Learners and Gender Differences in Strategy Preferences
............................................................................................................................................................................................. 75
Gökhan ÇETİNKAYA

Students’ Attitudes toward Web-Based Instruction in an Efl Setting ................................................................................. 94

Gülbin ÖZDEMİR

Effective Ways of Teaching Vocabulary ............................................................................................................................ 99

İrfan TOSUNCUOĞLU

Adapting Materials in English Language Teaching .......................................................................................................... 106

İsmail Fırat ALTAY

Gradation of the Course Content in English Language Teaching ..................................................................................... 131

İsmail Fırat ALTAY

An Intercultural Outlook on the “Native Speaker Instructor” Factor and Its Reflections on the Students’ Attitudes towards
Speaking Course ............................................................................................................................................................... 139
İsmail YAMAN

Clinical Supervision: A Viable Option for Language Teacher Development ................................................................... 151
M. Naci KAYAOGLU & M. Kerem KOBUL

6
Got Poetry? A “Best-Practices” Poetry Lesson ................................................................................................................. 160
Marna BROEKHOFF

The Language Used In Turkish and English Versions of Tourism Brochures ................................................................... 166
Nalan KIZILTAN

The Relationship between Students’ Use of Reading Strategies and Reading Achievement ............................................. 176
Yusuf ŞEN & Mesut KULELİ

7
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”
November 15-17, 2012 SAMSUN

THE USE OF FLIPPED CLASSROOM IN FOREIGN LANGUAGE

TEACHING
Ahmet Başal *

ABSTRACT

With the rise of educational technology, many teachers are gradually taking innovative steps to
redesign their teaching methods and language teachers are no exception. Flipped learning or flipped
classroom is one of these steps in which students can watch instructional videos outside the classroom and
can do the assignments and other engaging activities inside the classroom. In foreign language classes, such
an approach may offer great benefits both for the language teachers and for the students since they can use
classroom time to do more engaging activities. This would also help language teachers to complete all the
subjects in the curriculum by extending the classroom hours. The videos used in a flipped classroom can be
either recorded by the teachers or chosen from a variety of Internet resources with some or no modifications.
The aim of this study is to introduce the implementation of a flipped classroom in English Language classes
and offer some suggestions. To this end, accounts of previous experiences and excerpts from the students’
reflections on the flipped classroom are presented.

Keywords: Flipped learning, elt classroom, web 2.0 tools

1. INTRODUCTION
The use of technology has becoming an indispensable part of educational settings and
language teaching is no exception. English language teachers increasingly use the technology to
make their lessons more attractive. Video, one of those technologies, is an effective teaching tool
if/when used properly (Hartsell & Yuen 2006; Shephard 2003). Teachers all over the world have
been using videos to support their instruction. Video lectures which seem different from using
videos in the classroom is not a new concept; however, the technology used in the production,
editing and distribution of these videos are easier for the teachers with the rapid developments in
technology (Whitley-Grassi & Baizer, 2010). Here comes the new term flipped or inverted
classroom. Flipped classroom has brought an innovative perspective to the traditional lectures.
Many scholars have mentioned the ineffectiveness of lectures in traditional learning environments
(eg: Berryman,1993; Millis, 1995). Flipped classroom may be used as a new approach to eliminate
the ineffectiveness of the traditional face-to-face lessons. In the literature, there are findings that
flipped classroom is effective in terms of increasing the grades of the students when compared
traditional lecture-based class (eg: Day & Foley, 2006). In addition, students prefer the flipped
classroom to traditional lecture (Lage, Platt, & Treglia, 2000).

Flipped classroom have mainly perceived as using recorded lecture videos for instruction.
However, this is seeing the tip of an iceberg. Actually, flipped classroom is not just recording the
didactic content of the lesson in front of a computer and sending it as pre-lecture videos to the
students before the lesson. If this is the case, there must be a misunderstanding in the flipped

*
Asst. Prof. Dr. Ahmet Başal , Yıldız Technical University – Faculty of Education – Department of Foreign Languages
Education – [email protected]

8
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

classroom model and it is useless. In a flipped classroom, the time spent in class is actually more
important than the videos recorded. When using flipped classroom model, classroom time can be
used for dealing with engaging activities, discussing the concepts, working on the hard-to-
understand information, answering students’ questions related the content etc. These videos can
free the teachers and leave the class time for problem solving and hands-on activities, converting
the classroom a place where active learning takes place. Bergmann and Sams (2012) described
flipped classroom simply as “which is traditionally done in class is now done at home, and that
which is traditionally done as homework is now completed in class”.
Flipped classroom seems pedagogically sound since it serves the principles of
personalized-differentiated learning, student-centered instruction and constructivism in which
students take more responsibility for their learning. It is personalized because students can learn at
their own pace. It is student-centered because the class time can be used as an environment where
students participate in many engaging activities and the role of the teachers turns to a facilitator and
observer allowing students to be more active in the class. The class will be suitable for the
constructivist approach because the class time is freed from the didactic lecturing of the teacher
allowing a huge variety of activities, group work and discussions that provides an interactive
environment for the students. However, teachers cannot see flipping classroom as a solution to all
their teaching problems. On the other hand, it is obvious that it allows teachers to free their class-
time and present choices to the students in their learning rather than just informing them about the
lesson subject in sit-and-listen lesson format. With the flipped classroom model, Elt teachers can
record their videos, add interactive elements into these videos and other previously recorded video
segments of other teachers. Therefore, the video will include to some extent “bring the world
approach” and may become more engaging, motivating and attractive to the students.

2. IMPLEMENTATION OF FLIPPED CLASSROOM

In the literature, there are many models for the flipped classroom, that is, no single model
for it. It can even be stated that there are as many approaches as the number of researchers
implementing it. Actually, the term flipped classroom is commonly used for any classes in which
videos are used as pre-prepared lessons. However, the magic in flipped classroom is not just the
pre-recorded videos but the free class-time and integration of both by adopting an overall approach.
The researcher is of the opinion that pre-recorded videos should be combined with class-time
activities and other elements of technology should be integrated into this process in order it to be
virtuous cycle. Otherwise, just using the videos and the class-time may turn to be ineffective and
time-consuming process, that is, a vicious cycle. Flipped classroom has an underlying idea that
instruction should not be limited to class-time but should take place outside the classroom by using
different mediums that are not just the pre-recorded lecture videos.
Flipped classroom can be divided into two learning environments: outside and inside. Both
sides should be perfectly integrated into each other in order this model to be effective. The first step
for teachers is Planning. Teachers should plan in detail what to the inside and outside. The second
step is selecting appropriate activities. The activities should include a huge variety as far as
possible to address the needs of all learners. Such an approach may provide rich learning
opportunities for all of the students having different learning styles. The third is to think on how to
completely integrate things in outside and inside. This is especially important since flipped
classroom is a blended learning and teaching approach. Therefore, no part can be planned and
implemented separately. The fourth step is to use a Learning Management System (LMS),
allowing to present all the learning and teaching activities to the students in an organized way.
LMS is an integral part of flipped classroom, because it has a function of connecting outside and
inside part of the flipped classroom like a bridge. Without LMS, it is hard to blend these two parts
effectively. An example of practical implementation model for flipped classroom can be seen in
fig. 1.

9
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Fig. 1: A Practical Implementation Model for Flipped ELT Classroom

In a flipped classroom, videos are recorded before the lesson and sent to the students
mostly through the Internet. These videos should not be just the recordings of the lectures. They
must include animations, quizzes, other videos etc. to be engaging for the students. Otherwise,
students will watch monotonous videos that make them become passive learners again. These
videos can not have the desired effect on the learning outcomes. Therefore, they should also be
supported by other tools such as wallwisher, voxopop, jogtheweb etc. that are called as Web 2.0
Tools. It is good to use a Learning Management System (LMS) to have all these things under
control.

On the Internet, there are many LMSs which are free to use. Using an LMS such as
engrade (www.engrade.com) or schoology (www.schoology.com) , user friendly and free web sites
for conducting your flip classroom in an organized way, helps teachers to fully integrate all those
things at one place. With an LMS, teachers can send their videos, activities and assignments,
contact with their students, check and grade assignments and give links to other resources. This can
be seen as a learning environment open 7/24. In flipped classroom, the underlying idea is also
providing a non-stop connection between the teachers, the students and the teaching-learning
materials. This can only be achieved through an LMS.

3. ATTITUDES OF ELT STUDENTS TOWARDS FLIPPED CLASSROOM

I used the flipped model in 2012-2013 fall semester in Foreign Languages Education
Department of Yıldız Technical University in “Advanced Reading and Writing I” course. In order
to learn the opinions of my students on the use flipped learning model, wallwisher, a web 2.0 tool,
was used. Depending on the opinions of my students, it is concluded that the attitudes of the
majority of the students towards using a flipped learning model is mostly positive (Fig. 2).

10
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Fig 2: Screen-capture of the Opinions of the Students on the Use of Flipped ELT Classroom

5. CONCLUSION AND SUGGESTIONS

Flipped learning or flipped classroom is a kind of blended learning in essence. It is actually

not a new discovery, but the term is a recent one. Generally, the flipped model is understood as
using lecture-videos outside the classroom, which is in fact more than that. There are some
important benefits that flipped classroom can provide;
- freed-classroom time.
- opportunities for personalized learning.
- opportunities for a more student-centered learning.
- a continuous connection between the students and the teachers.
- an increase in the motivation of the students.
- a learning environment full of tools students are accustomed to.
- a variety in lecture content for different learning needs and styles.

In order to derive the above-mentioned benefits from the flip classroom, teachers should
first know the theories of learning and then flip their classrooms depending on the how learning
takes place. The teachers wanting to flip their classrooms should bear in mind that flip learning is
not just using the lecture videos outside the classroom. In this model, choosing the appropriate
engaging activities in the classroom time is also important. Moreover, having connection 24/7 with
students through the use of an LMS integrated with other web 2.0 tools providing engaging
activities is also important. The role of the teacher in this model is to guide the students. Therefore,
the teacher in the flip model is actually the most important element. Otherwise, the flipped
classroom model does not provide the desired outcomes. Flipped classroom may bring about many
benefits for ELT teachers including using videos of real life situations. Moreover, students can
listen to native speakers and teachers can take advantage of the ready-to-use rich content from the

11
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

internet. Once ELT teachers are comfortable with the use of flipped learning model, they can
discover many new and creative ways to improve the effectiveness the model.

Some suggestions for ELT teachers wishing to flip their classrooms;

1. take into account the learning styles of your students.

2. learn to use basic technological tools.
3. plan in detail what to the inside and outside the classroom.
4. choose appropriate activities depending on the learning styles of the students.
5. use a great variety of activities to engage all of the students.
6. integrate the appropriate web 2.0 tools.
7. use an LMS (learning management system) to integrate inside and outside the
classroom.

REFERENCES

Bergmann, J. & Sams, A. (2012). Flip Your Classroom: Reach Every Student in Every Class Every
Day. Washington, DC: International Society for Technology in Education.

Berryman, S.E. (1993). Designing Effective Learning Environments: Cognitive Apprenticeship

Models. New York, New York: Institute on Education and the Economy. Available at
http://www.ilt.columbia.edu/K12/livetext/ docs/berry1.html

Day, J., & Foley, J. (2006). Evaluating web lectures: a case study from HCI. Paper presented at the
Conference on Human Factors in Computing Systems, Montreal, Quebec, Canada.
Available at http://dl.acm.org/citation.cfm?doid=1125451.1125493

Hartsell, T. & Yuen, S. (2006). Video Streaming in Online Learning. Association for the
Advancement of Computing (AACE) Journal, 14(1), 31-43.

Lage, M.J., Platt, G.J., & Treglia, M. (2000). Inverting the classroom: a gateway to creating an
inclusive learning environment. The Journal of Economic Education, 31(1), Available at
http://www.jstor.org/stable/1183338

Millis, B.J. (1995). Introducing faculty to cooperative learning. In W.A. Wright (Ed.), Teaching
Improvement Practices: Successful Strategies for Higher Education (pp. 127–154). Boston,
MA: Anker Publishing Company.

Shephard, K. (2003). Questioning, promoting and evaluating the use of streaming video to support
student learning. British Journal of Educational Technology, 34 (3), 295–308.

Whitley-Grassi, N., & Baizer, J. S. (2010). Video lecture capture in physiology courses: student
attendance, video viewing and correlations to course performance. International Journal of
Instructional Technology and Distance Learning, 7(10), 31-38.

12
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”
November 15-17, 2012 SAMSUN

GRAMMAR LESSONS WITH THE FLIPPED CLASSROOM METHOD

Alessandra NICOLOSI
Metu University, Ankara
[email protected] ame

ABSTRACT

My talk will be focusing on a technique called “the flipped classroom”. I will draw attention to the statement
that the flipped classroom is not all about watching videos at home and doing homework in the classroom. In
fact this powerful method involves a sustain change of mentality not only in the methodology of delivering
information but also in the students’ learning process.
For years I asked myself if my students were really actively participating while I was explaining them
grammar or if they just were sitting passively. I was stuck doing examples after examples so I decided to flip
my grammar lessons. My lessons now are recorded/screen cast and put in the Internet in a ‘collaborative
environment’ where students can watch/listen and where feedback is provided with the help of technology.
“Screen cast-o-matic” is one of the amazing free teaching tools which allow me to manipulate my lessons
outside the classroom walls.
On one hand the flipped method has given me the great chance to get more aware of my students’ meta-
cognition abilities. On the other hand has provided the students with the most significant learning
opportunity; their teacher’s support when needed.

Keywords: flipped classroom; grammar; screen cast; record; video.

1. INTRODUCTION
This paper delineates a significant shift I underwent towards the way my grammar lessons
are submitted in the class. I began with a conjecture about what was the main difficulty I
experienced while delivering grammar lessons. Evaluating this factor, I concluded that my
discontent may have risen in part because everyday classroom experience rarely affords
opportunities to engage students with time practice and instead time in class is mainly used for
lecturing grammar. Thus, students lack appropriate experiences to interact dynamically.
Accordingly, I sought to devise, an experience to construct these target goals. Then I started to flip
my grammar lessons.
The experience involved a routine screen cast record of the grammar to be given at home as
homework. Students were asked to watch the video and synchronously interact with it. So doing, I
expected students would have coped with the task in authentic contexts and especially in an
environment which would have respected their cognitive ability.

2. THE FLIPPED CLASSROOM

The term ‘flipped classroom’ or ‘inverted classroom’ (Strayer, 2009) as such has gained lot
of popularity in the last ten years. According to Bermann & Sams (2012) Flipped Learning happens
when the teacher’s lecture is delivered to students via video outside of the classroom. Then
traditional class time is used for active problem solving and one-to-one or small group tutoring
with the teacher. What I would like to argue is that ‘flipped classroom’ method requires much more
than a simple change of directions of instructions.

13
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Teachers tent to monopolize class-period duration by overusing instructional time whereas

students’ participation is reduced to listening. Concurrently, when concepts are presented in a
structured manner during direct instruction a student may feel frightened because it may appear that
everybody in class understand and he may argue to himself he does not. In such a case he will
doubtfully request for a clarification not to put himself in ridiculous. In other circumstances a
student, during class time, may just meditate over personal daily life engagement and may not be
attentive to the lesson. Teachers, on the other hand, may talk too fast to be followed or handwriting
on the blackboard can be misread.
In all these above-mentioned cases students are missing something. In and of itself, the
source of information is the teacher and there is one-way flow, usually from teacher to students.
Being a language teacher requires a big portion of time lecturing grammar. Grammar lessons are
unavoidable in a language syllabus. As a teacher there are opportunities to vary exercises, to
change book, to create on line platforms and to generate extracurricular activities. Teachers can
also contribute to improve themselves in a myriad of forms, but as regard as for grammar lessons it
is only possible to reorganize the inputs while the topic must stay unaltered. Flipped classroom
method offers an opportunity to avoid partially some of the common quoted difficulties.
2.1. How to implement the Flipped method in class.
In order to perform the flipped method in class, it is necessary to inspect the range of
possible tools available. For the purpose the best tools are: video record, ready videos, vodcast or
podcast, screen cast.
As for myself I experienced that my students prefer their teacher talking, this is why I
opted for screen cast record. Although this option was the most suitable for me I must declare that
having students create videos is a great opportunity to apply the content themselves. To prepare the
screen cast a free on-line tool was used: ‘screen-o-matic’. Screen-o-matic is a flexible and intuitive
tool which offers to the user many features. It has a fifteen minutes record availability, a shared
account and a playlist. Furthermore it has a functional microphone adjustable directly from the
same recording page, a camera and an editable page which allows the user to correct mistakes
while recording. Last but not least, there is no need of downloading on the computer.
Now, given the tool, we must focus on the educational challenge in class and consequently
at home. As language teachers and educators what we do next? I explained, in the section above,
that the method is often simplified as videos being watched at home and homework being done at
school. In fact to flip a lesson you require activities to be done before, during and after the actual
lecture. The first step should be to give pre-training in the class. This could be key words, a small
introduction, and an example of the grammar. Alternatively it could be a brief presentation through
a reading or a video. In any case it should be a sort of guidelines to direct and brainstorm students
and to prepare them for the actual video. It is a fact of reality that delaying the direct instruction as
much as possible increases students’ curiosity.
The second step is the screen cast itself. Armed with the criteria that simply watching an
unattractive lecture video will not get students excited about this process we must set out a new
bridging task. After a long process of trials and errors I finally finalized a set of procedures which I
felt had a good chance of satisfying me. To begin, it is not tolerable to replace an hour classroom
lecture with an hour video. Audio and video should be used in short, five to ten minutes, segments.
Video must cover one topic at once. Content delivery must be clear and concise and should not
require a student to pause every few sentences. There should be opportunities for students to
interact with the information in these videos in a range of forms. Teachers also play a didactic role
and have huge responsibilities for the success of the screen cast. These roles include the ability to
set clear and detailed goals, to improvise if necessary, to have a personality and a bit of humor and
eventually the overall competence to be unambiguous. Teachers also must decide whether to write
or not the transcript to allow students to follow the flow of speaking.
A final step is to deliver the screen cast. A few on line free tools may serve the purpose.
Screen cast can be embedded in an editable web page or can be posted in You-Tube, Teacher-Tube,

14
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

School-Tube or Vimeo. Screen cast can also be sent as an e-mail to students or can be downloaded
to computers as an Mp3 file.
And now we are ready to whittle down forty minutes lecture to ten minutes video
2.2. Assimilate the video home lecture.
Because the work at home should not be without some sort of focus, opportunities must be
set up for students to think deeply and question what they have learned at home before coming to
class.
To interact with the videos, students are asked to take notes of important concepts and
examples and to answer questions posed to them. The quality and depth of their answers inform the
teacher of how much they truly comprehend and what misconceptions need to be further explained.
After this first approach, students may be asked to write at least one question regarding the content.
Questions are shared in the Internet where they are commented and elucidated by other students,
becoming an opportunity for everybody to deepen their misunderstanding. This method can be
easily associated with the asynchronous online tutoring which according to Macdonald offers an
occasion for reflection and flexibility (Macdonald, 2006). Teachers may also want students to
underline unclear parts of the transcript.
2.3. Back to class: The post-video lesson
The above explained process need to be reworded in class so that is the group or single
student that becomes the focus and not the lessons itself (Gerstein, 2000).
Back in class means that teachers will benefit from the use of additional time. The aim is to
use this time in the most advantageous form. When students come to class, their understanding is
reviewed. First they work in group to retrieve from their memory the learning material acquired as
well as to clarify anything that was not comprehensible during the video lesson. Questions that
students had asked are clarified. Problems are discussed among themselves or asked to the teacher
but in both cases the actual practice and feedback are given forthwith. It is believed that this
discussing factor have more impact on students achievement than the content-specific factor. In
fact, after learning concepts, students may conceptualize better through the process of ‘meaning
making,’ that is, they may need time to process and internalize their learning through discussions.
This can also be revealed from the questions sample the students utter which now change impact to
sound more specific and acute. Students not only are encouraged to work with one another, thus
helping them to develop peer interaction, but also they are constantly reminded that one way they
can really became aware of a concept is by explaining the same concept to someone else (Mazur,
1997). Time in class is also spared to design tasks that challenge students and force them to use the
language for a real communicative purpose, within a significant context. Eventually class time may
be use to perform experiential exercises, to debate or to test through quizzes
Generally speaking, the teacher devotes more meaningful time to the students personal and
specific questions by providing more elaborated conceptual explanations on students’ requirement.
Physically, teachers who were working at their desk now will be circulating the room.

3. CONCLUSION AND SUGGESTIONS

In the present article, I investigated an alternate way of lecturing grammar in a language
class. Recapitulating, the flipped classroom method helps students to switch from passive to active
lecturing mode. Based on the recognition that sitting and listening to a lecture is not the most
productive opportunity to learn, here are some of the critical questions to be taken into account
both as a language teacher and as a teacher in general terms. Do we want the students to master the
subject? Do we want to increase students understanding? Do we want to let them to own the
content? Do we want to create an environment that is student centered? If teaching is not a
‘transfer of knowledge’ it is obvious to conclude that a learner must own the information and make
sense of it. Teachers may decide then to have the information examined at home and alone instead

15
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

of using time in class. I believe that a crucial part of the learning take place in those occasions.
Unfortunately many teachers make many efforts to prepare lessons plan, they concentrate on what
to say forgetting what their students may need. Then they deliver what they consider important. But
we know that curriculum planning is not always reflected on the students learning speed of
information. The flipped classroom method encourages a different approach of delivering and
assimilating information.
Based on the above analysis, here are some of the benefits and drawbacks of using such a
model. It may be argued that, as far as the cognitive ability is concerned, students are not
confronted with spontaneous questions during the interaction with the video. But, it is interesting to
notice that engaging with the video will lead to the maximum retention of information and will
inspire high level thinking skills. Still, when considering the unusualness of the method of
‘teaching with the flipped classroom model’ some issues become particularly problematic. Because
it absorbs more time for the students to watch and work on the video they might refuse it. Honestly
and according to my experience, students do not refuse the method if the amount of time they have
to spend at home is cleverly balance. Eventually learners need to be conduct carefully through a
new way of teaching and learning altogether. Another contradictory aspect is the internet access.
Some students may complain about lacking a wireless connection at home. Yet despite the
polemical perspective, there is a remedy for this situation. Video material can be burned to DVDs
and can be gained access on students’ home DVD player. Having debated the plausibility of
various negative possibilities, one question remains unsolved. If students refuse to watch or just do
not watch the video, how is the situation handled? Theoretically, motivation may fall at any time
but in my view, it is necessary to move beyond the simple statement that student must study. If we
teach them to manipulate their time and organize it in a more systematic way this eventually and
evidently, will benefit their learning process and their motivation. If not, practically, students who
come unprepared can be involved in group discussion as peer-observer and they can be asked to
take notes.
Focusing now on the advantages of teaching with the flipped classroom it is correct to say
that the content, often the theoretical/lecture-based component of the lesson, becomes more easily
controlled by the learner. Because students learn at different speed, they might miss a piece of
information while in class but with a video they have control over the medium. They have the
ability to review parts that are misunderstood or which need reinforcement or those parts that are of
particular interest. Students can watch or listen over and over, pause, working a bit, and then play
the video again. This helps students to become active learners and to develop learning autonomy
because they have control over their input and they know when to learn and how to learn
(Pacansky-Brock, 2012, Chapter 1). Moreover most of the students who are struggling in class are
offered a safe place where they can ask questions and share their confusion anonymously and
without ridicule from peers. These same students may also need more time and individual attention
to learn material. Besides, videos play a big role for those students who miss school and need
assistance and support. If videos are placed all together and forthcoming subjects are collected
students may want to challenge themselves and study alone as well as review any time past
concepts.
From the previous discussion, we can draw a main conclusion; although teachers may
believe their content, once created, will last for many years, the ‘flipped classroom’ is successful
only when resources are updated with the need of students in mind. The flipped classroom method
must be evaluated as an extra educational opportunity available and not as the opportunity to avoid
lecturing grammar in class. As Wolk (2011) reported, “The more educational opportunities
available to young people both in and out of school, the more likely to find a path-way to success
that is compatible with their unique needs and talent”
Deciding to flip part of the lesson will not automatically make it a better lesson. It is
important to be intentional about when to flip and clear about what the benefits will be for students.

16
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

REFERENCES

Bergmann J, & Sams A. (2012). Flip your classroom: reach every student in every class every day.
International Society for Technology in Educa.

Gerstein, J. (2000). Work in progress: facilitating the human side of experience-based training. (3rd
ed.). Wood & Barnes Publishing. Oklahoma City.

MacDonald, J. (2006). Blended learning and online tutoring: a good practice guide. Gower.Mazur,
E. (1997). Peer instruction: A user's manual. Prentice Hall Upper Saddle River, NJ.

Mull, B. (2012, January 11). Webinar with Alan November and Dr. Eric Mazur. E. [video file].
Retrived from http://novemberlearning.com/webinar-with-alan-november-and-dr-eric-
mazur/.

Pacansky-Brock, M. (2012). Best practices for teaching with emerging technologies. Routledge.

School Tube. (2011, December 6). Flip your classroom with online discussions. [video file].
Retrived from http://bit.ly/tkVu6a

Smith, C. (2012). Screencasting. Retrived from http://prezi.com/sqwbsy0zqqt6/screencasting/.

Smith, C. (2012). Flipped-classroom. Retrived from http://prezi.com/-vbtn0xnnyzx/my-flipped
classroom/.

Strayer, J. (2009). Inverting the classroom: A study of the learning environment when an intelligent
tutoring system is used to help students learn. Lightning Source Incorporated.

Wolk, R. A. (2011). Wasting minds: why our education system is failing and what we can do about
it. ASCD.

17
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”
November 15-17, 2012 SAMSUN

USING VIDEO-RECORDING METHOD IN LISTENING AND SPEAKING

CLASSES

Betul Ayse SAYIN*

ABSTRACT

Learning is driven by what teachers and pupils do in classrooms. Here, teachers have to manage
complicated and demanding situations, channeling the personal, emotional and social pressures amongst a
group of 30 or so youngsters in order to help them to learn now, and to become better learners in the future.
In terms of systems engineering, present policy seems to treat the classroom as a black box. What is
happening inside the classroom is not clear enough to compare the certain input with a particular output
(Wiliam, 2001). Reflective teaching sheds light to the dark sides of the classroom and fosters teaching.
Reflective practice is an integral component of a teacher’s classroom success. Video-enhanced reflection is a
process that uses video analysis to stimulate reflective thought.
Listening and speaking are not only the important forms of communication, but also the most direct
language activities for people to convey information and express their ideas (JIA Xiao-yun, 2011). We have
made a research on the importance of these skills and since the 1970s, emphasis on teaching languages for
proficiency and stress on language as a means of communication have given a new dimension to the
importance of receptive skills in communication. Since then, the foreign language teaching field set aside a
response-oriented paradigm and adopted an input, or stimulus oriented learning one, in which listening
comprehension and delayed oral practice are the basis of instruction (Feyten, 1991). Video-enhanced
reflective practice is used to check how video-recording method effects the acquisition of these skills
together with bringing success for the teacher from the sphere of teaching practices.
In this article, I would like to mention the role of video-recording method of reflective teaching, its
usability and benefits for teaching listening and speaking skills in EFL classes.

Keywords: video-recording, reflective teaching, reflective practice, listening, speaking, listening

and speaking skills.

1. INTRODUCTION
Classroom observation and looking into the depths of classes so as to feel the atmosphere
there and understand what’s going on beyond what we know is part of action researches.
Observation has always been necessary to develop new methods and approaches in teaching and
improve professional development of teachers.
Observation can encourage teacher trainees and in service teachers to reflect upon their
teaching and make such reflection a permanent part of their teaching regimen. A developmental
model of observation ensures that teachers are given the chance to “develop their own judgments
of what goes on in their own classroom…sharpen their awareness of what their pupils are doing
and the interactions that take place in their classes…and heighten their ability to evaluate their own
teaching practices (Williams 1989, p.85). Especially, trainees who sense that observations are

*
Instructor, Canik Basari University

18
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

based on their real instructional context and who are involved in all stages of the process will be
more inclined to reflect on their roles as teachers and to grow from the experience (Ali, 2007).
According to Wallace (1991, 82), reflection is key to teacher development because “it is
through reflection on professional action that professional expertise is developed.” Critical
reflection encourages educators “to develop the skills of considering the teaching process
thoughtfully, analytically, and objectively as a way of improving classroom practices” (Richards
2002, 23).
Hatton and Smith (1995) suggest the educational system needs to continue to train teachers
on reflection, and more importantly create a system where in-service teachers are supported,
recognized, and provided the tools to effectively and consistently engage in reflective practices.
Zeichner and Liston (1987) maintain that to simply have "teachers try to 'reflect' on their actions
and purposes" is not enough (p. 236).
The first barrier refers to the false notion that reflection is not considered an essential
component of a teacher's job. Hatton and Smith (1995) further discussed this issue, suggesting that
in the current educational system "teaching is seen to be primarily about the immediate present and
instant pragmatic action, while reflecting is perceived as a more academic pursuit" that most
teachers do not have time nor support to engage (Hatton & Smith, 1995, p. 36). Hatton and Smith
(1995) suggest the educational system needs to continue to train teachers on reflection, and more
importantly create a system where in-service teachers are supported, recognized, and provided the
tools to effectively and consistently engage in reflective practices (Wright, 2008).
The second barrier to reflective practice arises from the cost (i.e., time and effort) of
reflection. Many teachers have claimed that the benefits of reflecting are out-weighed by the
investment cost (Ross, 2007). Hatton and Smith (1995) further clarify the issue, arguing that
"reflection is unlikely to develop as a professional perspective in today's busy and demanding
world of teacher's work" (p. 38). The video-enhanced reflection process used in this study is
believed to address this barrier by providing a tool and process that creates the motivation
necessary to engage teachers in reflective practice where the benefits outweigh the costs (Wright,
2008).

2. REVIEW OF LITERATURE
2.1. Using Video-recording Method of Reflective Teaching
Sherin and Van Es (2003) define the benefits and relationship video has on teacher
reflective practices by suggesting that video improves a teacher's ability to notice and interpret
what is happening in their classroom. In addition, it promotes discussion that leads to implementing
new strategies and techniques.
Observing, analyzing, and discussing classroom performance is enhanced by the use of
videotaping. Recording lessons for self-observation:
• allows students to distance themselves and be dispassionate about their teaching (van Lier
1988);
• helps trainees notice and respond to both strong and weak aspects of their teaching;
• allows trainees to view a DVD immediately and re-examine it many times; and
• has a well-known motivating effect (Wallace 1981; Murphey 2000; Bailey, Curtis, and
Nunan 2001; Maclean and White 2007).
Video or audio recordings of lessons can provide very useful information for reflection.
You may do things in class you are not aware of or there may be things happening in the class that
as the teacher you do not normally see.

19
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Audio recordings can be useful for considering aspects of teacher talk.

• How much do you talk?
• What about?
• Are instructions and explanations clear?
• How much time do you allocate to student talk?
• How do you respond to student talk?
• Video recordings can be useful in showing you aspects of your own behaviour.
• Where do you stand?
• Who do you speak to?
• How do you come across to the students? (Tice, 2011)
Farrell (2004, 27) identifies the following fundamental questions that a teacher should
reflect on:
1. What am I doing in the classroom?
2. Why am I doing this?
3. What is the result?
4. Will I change anything based on the information gathered from answering the first three
questions?
Though the majority are yes/no questions, they still direct trainees’ attention towards their
classroom behavior and make them focus on and review particular moments of the microteaching
(Orlova, 2009).
Schratz (1992: 89) comments:
Audio-visual recordings are powerful instruments in the development of a lecturer’s self-
reflective competence. They confront him or her with a mirror-like “objective” view of what goes
on in class. Moreover, class recordings which are kept for later use, can give a valuable insight into
an individual teacher’s growth in experience over years (Jack Richard, 1996).
2.2. The Importance of Listening and Speaking Skills
Ever-growing needs for fluency in English around the world because of the role of English
as the world’s international language have given priority to finding more effective ways to teach
English. It is therefore timely to review what our current assumptions and practices are concerning
the teaching of these crucial language skills (Richards, 2008).
When we look through the nature of a language, we realize that majority of people listen
and speak more than they write and read. This is certainly true with regard to our mother-tongue;
but how about the foreign languages? Stager mentions that Professor von Jagemann, who thinks it
very important that the student should become acquainted with the spoken idiom, an opinion
generally held among the modern philologists both of America and Europe. Speaking above all
other things makes us acquainted with the spoken language (L. A. Stäger, 1886). In speaking and
listening we tend to be getting something done, exploring ideas, working out some aspect of the
world, or simply being together (Jones, 1996).
It has been claimed that over 50 percent of the time that students spend functioning in a
foreign language will be devoted to listening (Nunan, 1998). Despite this, we often take the
importance of listening for granted, and it is arguably the least understood and most overlooked of
the four skills in the language classroom.

20
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Listening is the natural precursor to speaking; the early stages of language development in
a person’s first language (and in naturalistic acquisition of other languages) are dependent on
listening (I.S.P. Nation, 2009). Similarly, in second language learning, several writers and
researchers in the early 1980s suggested that listening had a very important role (Winitz, 1981).
The listening-only period is a time of observation and learning which provides the basis for the
other language skills.
Listening is an activity that is both reflective and reflexive. The ways in which we listen
not only make us receptive to the sounds and meanings of others, but they also provide the contexts
for shaping speech acts that make it possible for others to listen to us. Listening is a form of
attention, not only in the sense that we await and focus on what someone else is saying but also in
the sense that the utterance of another takes shape in our own mind.
The act of listening is social as well as physical. In addition to hearing the sounds that
others produce, the act of listening implies an interaction that creates context and meaning. Just as
we listen to the overtones of an acoustic guitar for the full shaping of even a single note, so we
listen most acutely when we are sensitive not only to another’s voice but also to the intention and
implications of what we’re hearing.
Listening is a dialogic art. The art of that listening, broadly speaking, takes two different
forms. On the one hand, we often find ourselves listening for something. Every time a teacher asks
a question to which she knows the answer, she is listening for an answer. She attends not only to
the student’s voice but also to the answer she is waiting to hear (Kaplan, 2009).
Approaches to the teaching of speaking in ELT have been more strongly influenced by fads
and fashions than the teaching of listening. “Speaking” in traditional methodologies usually meant
repeating after the teacher, memorizing a dialog, or responding to drills, all of which reflect the
sentence-based view of proficiency prevailing in the audio-lingual and other drill-based or
repetition-based methodologies of the 1970s. The emergence of communicative language teaching
in the 1980s led to changed views of syllabuses and methodology, which are continuing to shape
approaches to teaching speaking skills today. Grammar-based syllabuses were replaced by
communicative ones built around notions, functions, skills, tasks, and other non-grammatical units
of organization (Richards, 2008).
According to the research we did on the importance of language skills among 52
elementary and pre-intermediate level university students, the results have shown that two third of
the students see the ‘speaking skill’ as the most important to acquire and the listening skill either in
the first or second rank. They both are seen as the main skills in learning English as a foreign
language (EFL). But again the same study has shown that they are not successful in speaking and
listening as they are in other skills. We have seen that they are very enthusiastic to acquire these
skills and to communicate in a foreign language. Importance of oral practice and communication
are their reasons to rank these skills as the first according to the questionnaire. After this we
decided to use video-recording method of reflective teaching in listening and speaking classes in
order to check its use for the urgency of the improvement of these skills.

3.METHODOLOGY
3.1. The Methods of Teaching Listening and Speaking
Many traditional classroom listening activities focus primarily on bottom-up processing,
with exercises such as dictation, cloze listening, the use of multiple-choice questions after a text,
and similar activities that require close and detailed recognition, an processing of the input.
Top-down processing on the other hand, refers to the use of background knowledge in
understanding the meaning of a message. Whereas bottom-up processing goes from language to

21
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

meaning, top-down processing goes from meaning to language. In real-world listening, both
bottom-up and top-down processing generally occur together (Richards, 2008).
Successful listening can also be looked at in terms of the strategies the listener uses when
listening. Does the learner focus mainly on the content of a text, or does he or she also consider
how to listen? A focus on how to listen raises the issues of listening strategies. Strategies can be
thought of as the ways in which a learner approaches and manages a task, and listeners can be
taught effective ways of approaching and managing their listening (Richards, 2008). There are two
kinds of strategies identified in listening: Cognitive strategies and metacognitive strategies (Buck,
2001).
Here, we focused on metacognitive listening strategies. Metacognitive strategies are
conscious or unconscious mental activities that perform an executive function in the management
of cognitive strategies (Richards, 2008). It has four phases: Assessing the situation, monitoring,
self-evaluating, self-testing.
When we look at teaching speaking, since each skill has its own methods to teach, we see
that speaking is categorized according to its functions. Richards (2008:20) states that in designing
speaking activities or instructional materials for second-language or foreign-language teaching, it is
also necessary to recognize the very different functions speaking performs in daily communication
and the different purposes for which our students need speaking skills. These functions of speaking
are listed as “talk as interaction, talk as transaction, talk as performance” in the framework of
Brown and Yule (Richards, 2008).
Talk as interaction refers to what we normally mean by “conversation” and describes
interaction that serves a primarily social function. When people meet, they exchange greetings,
engage in small talk, recount recent experiences, and so on, because they wish to be friendly and to
establish a comfortable zone of interaction with others. Talk as transaction refers to situations
where the focus is on what is said or done. The message and making oneself understood clearly and
accurately is the central focus, rather than the participants and how they interact socially with each
other. The third type of talk, talk as performance refers to public talk, that is, talk that transmits
information before an audience, such as classroom presentations, public announcements, and
speeches (Richards, 2008).
3.2. Participants and Data Collection Analysis for both Listening and Speaking Skills
with the use of Video-recording
We used the video-recording method of reflective teaching for the monitoring phase of
metacognitive listening strategies. The observation was held among 21 pre-intermediate level
university preparation course students consisting of four different departments. After the planning
phase in which the objectives are determined and the short-term and long-term goals are identified,
the teacher checks in the monitoring phase how the tasks are carried out. At that stage, video-
recordings have been helpful to collect the data both to handle the planning and the monitoring
phases. Teachers can see the weakness in themselves and in students vividly. They have seen what
the students needed during the listening classes. What was decided to be checked was whether the
students understood the listening text after the second listening, whether there were many unknown
words or the words were explained before and tangible for them, whether the pronunciation of the
listening text was understandable and whether the length of the listenings were enough for the level
of students or not. And also whether the majority (nearly all of the students) understood the
listening text and reached the correct answer for the task was controlled, as well. With the help of
video-recordings, what had been planned to check was looked through in the monitoring phase in
several lessons. The teacher watched the videos and made a critique of herself.
It is seen that recordings were helpful and easy for the teacher to see her competence in
teaching listening and to take the right action for the previous wrong attitude such as listening the
answers of half of the class. She started questioning each student about the number of answers they
understood and checking the written activity on their desks.

22
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Being recorded was a control over the teacher and kept the teacher always aware of her goals
and the target group. Students were observed that they liked the listening tasks since they began to
understand the texts with the effort of the teacher, and when their unvoiced demands were met.
In class practice for video-recording we used the talk for transaction function of speaking
since it focuses on the message, employs communication strategies for participants, includes
frequent repetition, checks comprehension and explains a need or intention. Besides, the students
have elementary – pre-intermediate level and they need more to focus on the situations and to learn
how to respond to situations. The study was conducted by a female teacher among her students.
The teacher used pair-work activities and group activities, role-plays, and in-class competitions
while recording both the students and herself, as well.
With the aid of recording, teacher managed to make her students to focus on the activity.
They handled it more realistic, paid attention to their roles and listened to each other. Group
activities for speaking always cause a noisy atmosphere in the classroom, though. Yet what was
aimed was reached. Teacher had the chance to see herself as a facilitator and decide whether she
was sufficient to facilitate the conversations and talks. She saw how much time she allocated for
the activities, she decided later on whether it was less or more for the activities and whether the
students’ performance worked out the way she expected.
Both in listening and speaking classes, the first several recordings are used first to see the
problem during the learning and teaching phases of these skills; they shed light to identify the
weaknesses of both the teacher and the students. Next recordings were used to monitor both the
teacher and the students in order to see the improvements in actions towards the target behaviour.
After every recording, we see that the teacher masters in situation, controls his/her behaviours and
facilitates the class in the way she wants. Even the minor change in the method of teaching after the
teacher’s own comments for recordings is enough both to please the teacher and to provide students
with improved skills.

4. FINDINGS AND DISCUSSION

Both in listening and speaking classes, the first several recordings are used first to see the
problem during the learning and teaching phases of these skills; they shed light to identify the
weaknesses of both the teacher and the students. Next recordings were used to monitor both the
teacher and the students in order to see the improvements in actions towards the target behaviour.
After every recording, we see that the teacher masters in situation, controls his/her behaviours and
facilitates the class in the way she wants. Even the minor change in the method of teaching after the
teacher’s own comments for recordings is enough both to please the teacher and to provide students
with improved skills.

5. CONCLUSION AND SUGGESTIONS

Reflective practice is an integral component of a teacher’s classroom success (Zeichner,
Valli). Current research has shown that when teachers are reflective practitioners, their teaching
improves (Wright, 2008). Video-recording method of reflective teaching has shown that teachers
can use this method in order to improve the quality of their teaching methods of listening and
speaking which are seen as the major skills nowadays, yet for other skills, as well.
Instead of keeping diaries, writing comments and asking colleagues for peer observation
for each target lesson as part of reflective teaching, video-recording is more objective, less time
consuming and more practical for peer comments.
Additionally, video recording has special value for non-native English speaking trainees
because it enables them to focus not only on the nonverbal aspects of their teaching but also to
reflect on their communicative competence, including their language proficiency, knowledge of
essential language functions, and their style of teacher-student interaction (Orlova, 2009).

23
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

REFERENCES
Ali, S. (2007). Ref lective Teacher Observation Model for In-Service Teacher Trainees.
English Teaching Forum, 1, 16-24.

Buck, G. (2001). Assessing Listening. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Feyten, C. M. (1991). The Power of Listening Ability: An Overlooked Dimension in Language

Acquisition, The Modern Language Journal, Vol.75, Issue 2, pages 173-180, 1991. The
Modern Language Journal, 75(2), 173-180.

Harris, A. (1998). Effective Teaching: A review of the literature. School Leadership &
Management, 169-183.

I.S.P. Nation, J. N. (2009). Teaching ESL/EFL Listening and Speaking. New York: Routledge
Taylor & Francis.

Jack Richard, C. L. (1996). Reflective Teaching in Second Language Classrooms. NY, USA:
Cambridge University Press.

JIA Xiao-yun, F. G.-r. (2011). Strategies to Overcome Listening Obstacles and Improve the
Listening Abilities. US-China Foreign Language, 9(5), 315-323.

Jones, P. (1996). Planning an Oral Language Program. In P. Jones, & P. Jones (Ed.), Talking to
Learn (pp. 12-26). Melbourne: PETA.

Kaplan, A. (2009). Editor's Introduction: Acts of Listening. Schools: Studies in Education,

9(1), pp. 1-9.

L. A. Stäger, H. C. (1886). Speaking as Means and End of Language Teaching. Transactions

and Proceedings of the Modern Language Association of America, 2, pp. xviii-xxiv .

Nunan, D. (1998). Approaches to Teaching Listening in the Language Classroom. Korea

TESOL Conference, (pp. 287-297). Taejon, Korea.

Orlova, N. (2009). Video Recording as a Stimulus for Reflection in Pre-Service EFL Teacher
Training. English Teaching Forum, 2, 30-35.

Richards, J. C. (2008). Teaching Listening and Speaking: From Theory to Practice. New York,
USA: Cambridge University Press.

Tice, J. (2011, June 15). British Council, BBC. Retrieved from www.teachenglish.org.

24
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Wiliam, P. B. (2001). Inside the Black Box: Raising Standards Through Classroom
Assessment. King’s College London School of Education.

Winitz, H. (1981). The Comprehension Approach to Foreign Language Instruction. Rowley,

Massachusetts: Newbury House.

Wright, G. A. (2008). How Does Video Analysis Impact Teacher Reflection for-Action?
Brigham Young Institution, Department of Instructional Psychology.

25
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”
November 15-17, 2012 SAMSUN

POETRY AS AN INTEGRATIVE AND SUPPLEMENTARY

TEACHING RESOURCE

Dalga ÖZAL, Zerrin EREN

ABSTRACT

Poetry, if chosen carefully and used properly, can be a striking language teaching resource and this
presentation aims to highlight the effectiveness of contemporary poetry as an integrative and supplementary
teaching resource. Furthermore, this presentation is based on the thesis study titled Using Poetry in Teaching
English to Intermediate Level EFL Students by Dalga Özal, under the supervision of Asst. Prof. Dr. Zerrin
Eren. To indicate the strength of poetry-based activities, a 15-week experimental study was conducted with
the ninth-grader intermediate level EFL students at Samsun Anatolian Fine Arts High School. An
experimental group and a control group were chosen randomly and the experimental group was instructed
through poetry-based activities while the control group was instructed through traditional methods.
Considering the experimental group, activity organization was an important issue as well as the careful text
selection. Throughout the study, both groups were given four progress tests and a final test. The data gathered
from all the tests were analysed with the Levene’s T-test in the statistical analysis program SPSS. As a result,
statistically significant differences were found between the two groups’ tests scores. Based upon these
findings, poetry-based activities can be said to be more effective in developing the ninth-grader intermediate
EFL students’ major language skills than the traditional teaching methods and techniques.

Keywords: literature, poetry, literature and language teaching, poetry and major language skills,
teaching English through poetry.

1. INTRODUCTION

During the compelling and demanding language teaching process, people constantly try to
find different methods and techniques in order to overcome the problems encountered by the
learners while learning a foreign language. There are many language-teaching materials such as
course books on recent methods, and new teaching techniques based on recent technological
developments. Preferring a method to another, or choosing any language teaching material depends
on the teacher, because of the fact that a method or a technique which is effective for a specific
learner group may be ineffective for the other. Poetry, if chosen carefully and used properly, can be
a remarkable language teaching resource in this complicated process since it is universal among all
societies and deals with themes that are common to all cultures and human experiences, such as
love, death, nature, despair, and hope.

Although the use of poetry in language teaching is opposed because of its deviated
language and the use of highly figurative language such as symbols, metaphors, and
personification; the use of semantic ellipsis and unusual collocations; and the collocation of
unfamiliar elements and conventions in poetry, all these difficulties can be overcome using
carefully selected poems along with neatly organized activities.


Instructor, Ondokuz Mayıs University, School of Foreign Languages, [email protected]

Asst. Prof. Dr., Ondokuz Mayıs University, The Faculty of Education, Department of Foreign Languages Education,
English Language Education, [email protected]

26
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Carefully selected poems provide opportunities for learners to examine “the possibilities of
the language uses” (Lems 2001:24). They provide learners with valuable authentic contexts. Using
poetry in the classroom can lead the students naturally to freer, creative writing style as well, which
is distinguished from learners’ course context.

The poetry can be excellent material for promoting the integration of skills for language
learners. As Maley and Duff (1989:7) assert “Poetry offers a rich resource for input to language
learning”. In poetry, almost all the uses of language can be seen. A poem offers a ready-made
semantic field for the learners to enter; it includes the features of vocabulary, expressions, syntax,
structure, morphology, and stylistic devices.

Poetry has some fairly distinctive features, which distinguish it from other discourse and
which can be found in ordinary language, but are more frequent in poetry. They include rhyme,
rhythm, alliteration, and assonance.

Beside the advantage of compactness and brevity, many poems are well suited to a single
classroom lesson (Collie and Slater 1987:227).

It is useful to help our students identify and benefit from the unique features and
advantages of poetry. However, it should be emphasized again, when using poems what is most
important is the students’ response to them. The strategies used to study language with a poem
should allow the student to engage with the poem personally. The most important issue is the
learners’ feelings and personal interpretation of the poem, not the teacher’s analysis and
interpretation. To achieve this, learners should be encouraged to interact with the text and express
their personal response as well as to explore their own experiences in relation to the poem used.

Taking all these advantages into consideration, this study aimed to investigate the
effectiveness of contemporary poetry as an integrative and supplementary teaching resource in
comparison to traditional classroom techniques in teaching English to intermediate level ninth-
grader EFL students at Anatolian High Schools.

1.1 Aim and Significance of the Study

There are some theses on using poetry in the language classroom in Turkey. However, all
those studies were carried out at university level with upper intermediate or advanced level adult or
young adult learners, and they concentrated on grammar teaching, speaking skills and writing
skills. In addition, since the experiments were conducted in one or two lessons with only one or
two poems, these studies are considerably limited in observing the effects of using poetry. What is
different and significant in our study is its intent to enhance the language learning and to provide
skills integration by using poetry as a supplementary and integrative teaching material at
intermediate level with high school students during one educational term of 15 weeks.

1.2 The Scope of the Study

To make use of poetry in the most beneficial and effective way, and to benefit from its
special linguistic devices and figurative language in engendering the learners’ interpretative skills,
the learners should know some basic language structures. Owing to this fact, the students of the
intermediate level were chosen for this study. In addition to this, to avoid the possible ambiguity
and difficulty arising from the archaic words or syntax that older poems may include,

27
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

contemporary poetry was chosen. Besides, contemporary poetry has a variety of subject matters;
so, it is easy to choose poems which will appeal to the interest of the students.

The experimental study was conducted at Samsun İlkadım Anatolian Fine Arts High
School during the spring semester of 2004–2005 School Year.

This study investigated the following research questions:

1. May poetry be an applicable and effective supplementary language teaching resource in the
EFL classes of the ninth-grader intermediate level learners at Anatolian High Schools?
2. Will the use of poetry be beneficial in terms of skills integration?
3. Will the themes of contemporary English poetry provide a meaningful context than the
texts in traditional course books for the target learner group?

2. INSTRUCTIONAL PROCEDURE

Our study was an experimental one, to verify our hypotheses, an experimental group and a
control group were chosen randomly.

Considering the functions to be studied with the ninth graders in the language curriculum1,
we implemented a 15-week experimental study during the spring semester of 2004-2005 School
Year. First of all, the proficiency level of the groups was determined with a standardized
intermediate level Oxford test. After that, they were given a questionnaire, mainly, to reveal their
attitudes toward the traditional language teaching. After each two-week instructional period, they
were given a test to check their progress. Throughout the study, the experimental group was
exposed to an instruction based on the activities developed from English poetry. The activities
aimed at involving the students into learning process interactively. On the other hand, the control
group was taught with the traditional methods and techniques.

As well as a careful text selection, activity organization was another important issue in our
study. To promote learner-centred instruction and interaction, we planned thought provoking,
meaningful and enjoyable warm up activities, which directed them to the content of the poem to be
used. We generally made use of music and pictures at this stage. Sometimes advance organizers
were used as well.

At this stage, to give a detailed example of our activities, the first week’s activities of the
instructional period are going to be illustrated. For the first lesson, we prepared activities developed
from the poem Growing Pain by Vernon Scannel (See Appendix 1). We determined our main
instructional objectives as follows:

 to use prior knowledge to understand meaning

To enable the students

 to talk about personal experiences

 to make comparisons between the present and the past events
 to listen for specific information
 to transform information into a graphic
 to understand and negotiate the meaning of the poem

1
T.C. Milli Eğitim Bakanlığı Talim ve Terbiye Kurulu Başkanlığı Anadolu Lisesi (Hazırlık Sınıfı ve 9, 10, 11. sınıflar)
İngilizce Dersi Programı, Ankara 2002.

28
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

 to use some post-writing strategies

At the warming up stage, firstly, a song named Song Instead of a Kiss by Allanah Miles
was played with accompanying pictures on love on the OHP to call up the students’ schemata, and
to help them elicit the theme of the poem. After that, they were asked some questions about their
past experiences such as “Have you ever fallen in love?”, “How old were you when you first fell in
love?”, “Did you fall in love when you were at primary school?”, “Do you have a girl/boy friend
now? / What are your feelings? / What do you feel?”, “Have you ever experienced a platonic
love?”, “Have you ever written something like a poem about the person you loved?”, and so on.
Later, they were asked to compare their feelings about love in the past and at present making use of
a Venn diagram (See Appendix 2), and then they were asked to share their experiences with their
peers to find out if there were any similarities between their attitudes (See Appendix 3).

After the warm-up stage, the students listened to the poem, and they were asked some
comprehension questions such as “Who is the hero of the poem?”, “How old is he?”, “Where was
he sent?”, “What did he do there?” , “why can’t he sleep?”, “Why does he touch between his heart
and stomach?”, and so on.

Later, the students were supplied with the copies of the poem and they were asked to
discuss the questions “Who tells the poem? The little boy’s father or mother, and why do you think
so?” in pairs. Having reported their answers, the students were presented the unusual combination
of words and unusual word uses such as “the darkness whimpered, she hurts, she has been aching
here”, and they were required to work in groups and to try to write what the poet meant in standard
English. When they completed this activity, they reported their ideas to the class and compared
their ideas with the other groups. While they were working in pairs and in groups, the instructor
was checking their study and asking questions or participating in the discussions to promote the
interaction in the target language, and to make sure each member of a group was actively
participating in the work.

Then, the students were required to read the poem quietly to themselves. It was explained
that the overall feeling of a literary work was called the “mood” or the “tone”, and they were asked
to describe the mood of the poem. Although they had some difficulty at first, when it was explained
that the mood of a poem could be happy, sad, sentimental, or angry, they were able to define the
mood that the poet expressed, and the words and phrases conveyed that mood. After eliciting their
responses on the mood, the students were presented a chart, and they were asked to associate the
words about mood to the drawings on the chart as a vocabulary expansion activity.

Finally, as a follow-up activity, the students were asked to work in groups and turn the
poem into a short story in their own words. After they read their stories to the whole class, a poem
in heart shape was presented, and the students were asked to write their concrete love poem. Our
follow-up activities aimed at expanding the opportunity for the learners to relate what they studied
to their own experience. Students were given the chance to freely communicate their ideas and
responses in any way they wish. At this stage, great importance was given in order not to terminate
the students’ responses.

29
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

3. DATA ANALYSIS AND DISCUSSION

3.1 Evaluation of the Progress Tests and the Final Test Results

As has been stated in the method section, the experimental group and the control group
were given four progress tests and a final test throughout the experiment period, and each test
consisted of four sections: Listening, speaking, reading and writing. Both groups were tested with
the same measurement instruments to compare and contrast their skills improvement levels.

In our study, to evaluate the data gathered with the help of the progress tests and the final
test, we used the “t-test”. The t-test is used for testing differences between two means. A t-test for
independent groups is useful when the same variable has been measured in two independent groups
and the researcher wants to know whether the difference between group means is statistically
significant. “Independent groups” means that the groups have different people in them and that the
people in the different groups have not been matched or paired in any way. Therefore, in this study
students’ skills development in both groups was analysed by SPSS statistical analysis program and
results of the tests were discussed by Levene’s T-Test to see whether there was a significant
difference between the values of the experimental group and the control group. The t- test
significance value has to be “p<0,05” and our progress and final tests were evaluated considering
this value.

At the end of the evaluation period, it was seen that except the first listening and reading
skills progress test, there were statistically significant differences between the experimental group
and the control group; moreover, the experimental group is far more successful in all skills in all
progress tests and the final test. Below are the graphical representations of the total skills tests
scores:

Graph 1: Graphical Representation of the Total Listening Comprehension Test Scores of the
Experimental and the Control Groups:

22

20

18

16

LISTEN1

14
LISTEN2

LISTEN3
12
LISTEN4
Mean

10 FINALLIS
Experimental Control

METHOD

As is illustrated in the above graph, the experimental group scored better in all listening
skills tests administered throughout the study. Even in the first test, evaluation of which was not

30
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

detected a statistically significant difference between the mean scores of the two groups; the
experimental group was more successful than the control group.

Graph 2: Graphical Representation of the Total Speaking Skills Test Scores of the
Experimental and the Control Groups:

22

20

18

16

14

SPEAK1
12
SPEAK2
10
SPEAK3

8 SPEAK4
Mean

6 FINALSPE
Experimental Control

METHOD

Graph 2 illustrates that the experimental group was far more successful than the control
group in all speaking skills tests administered during the study. Thus, our experiment has been
more effective than the traditional methods in developing speaking skills.

Graph 3: Graphical Representation of the Total Reading Comprehension Test Scores of the
Experimental and the Control Groups:

26

24

22

20 READ1

READ2

18 READ3

READ4
Mean

16 FINALREA
Experimental Control

METHOD

31
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

We can conclude from the above graph that although there have not been statistically
significant differences between the mean scores of the two groups in the first and third reading
comprehension tests, the experimental group has scored better than the control group in all reading
tests.

Graph 4: Graphical Representation of the Total Writing Skills Test Scores of the
Experimental and the Control Groups:

22

20

18

16

14 WRITE1

WRITE2
12

WRITE3
10
WRITE4
Mean

8 FINALWRI
Experimental Control

METHOD

Graph 4 exhibits that the experimental group has been more successful than the control
group in all writing tests administered throughout our study; therefore our experiment has worked
better on the development of the writing skills than the traditional methods.

4. CONCLUSION

At the end of the data analyses of the progress tests and the final test we can assert that our
research hypothesis, which is poetry, if chosen carefully and used properly, may be an effective
language teaching tool, and may help the learners better in developing their language skills in the
EFL classroom in comparison with traditional language classroom, has been verified. The
experimental group has scored better than the control group in all progress tests and the final test
administered throughout our study. Therefore, the experimental group has been more successful
than the control group in each language skill test when evaluated independently from the other
skills.

The results of the progress tests and the final test have revealed that our study has achieved
skills integration better than the traditional methods –as a matter of fact, skills integration is not an
aim of the traditional methods. During our experiment, language skills have not been dealt with
separately. They have been presented in an integrated way. The basic framework of our sessions
has consisted of a pre-discussion to activate the students’ schemata making use of some related
materials and activities, listening to or reading the poem, discussing the questions on poem, and

32
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

finally performing some follow-up activities such as writing a group poem, creating a story,
making drawings or composing the poems produced.

The students have been given regular feedback; however, since our aim is not to teach
grammar, feedback has been given in the form of paraphrasing student utterances, asking students
for clarification of their own utterances or notes in the margin of student writing requesting
clarification; not in the form of overt correction. In addition, special attention has been paid not to
overwhelm the discourse while giving feedback. To avoid reinforcing their dependence on the
teacher as a constant monitor, peer correction and self-correction have been encouraged.

As well as integrating the four skills, the general framework of our sessions has contributed
to the progress of whole language learning and learner centeredness as it has allowed student
creativity and innovation in meaningful communication settings. Therefore, with the help
comprehensible input, namely carefully selected poems and accompanying activities, the students
in the experimental group have interacted with each other for meaningful purposes. As a result,
they have been more successful than the control group; therefore, our study has achieved its aim.

REFERENCES

Lems, Kristin. 2001. An American Poetry Project for Low Intermediate ESL Learners. English
Teaching Forum. 39 (4), 24-29.

Maley, Alan and Alan Duff. 1989. The Inward Ear. Poetry in the Language Classroom.
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Collie, Joanne and Stephen Slater. 1987. Literature in the Language Classroom. Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press.

Scannel, Vernon. 1993. Collected Poems 1950-1993. London: Robson Books.

33
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

APPENDICES

Appendix 1

Growing Pain
by Vernon Scannel

The boy was barely five years old.

We sent him to the little school
And left him there to learn the names
Of flowers in jam jars on the sill
And learn to do as he was told.
He seemed quite happy there until
Three weeks afterwards, at night,
The darkness whimpered in his room.
I went upstairs, switched on his light,
And found him wide awake, distraught,
Sheets mangled an his eiderdown
Untidy carpet on the floor.
I said ‘Why can’t you sleep? A pain?
He snuffled, gave a little moan,
And then he spoke a single word:
‘Jessica.’ The sound was blurred.
‘Jessica? What do you mean?’
‘A girl at school called Jessica,
She hurts—’ e touched himself between
The heart and stomach ‘—she has been
Aching here and I can see her.’
Nothing I had read or heard
Instructed me in what to do.
I covered him and stroked his head.
‘The pain will go in time.’ I said.

34
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Appendix 2

Venn Diagram Graphic Organizer by the Researcher

Appendix 3

A Group’s Love Venn

35
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Appendix 4

A Sample Concrete Love Poem by the Researcher

Appendix 5

A Concrete Love Poem by a student in the Experimental Group

“Broken heart
Needs
A brand new start”

36
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”
November 15-17, 2012 SAMSUN

LANGUAGE LEARNING STRATEGIES USED BY PROPECTIVE TEACHERS

AT ENGLISH AND GERMAN LANGUAGE TEACHING DEPARTMENTS

Dilek ÇAKICI **, Adnan OFLAZ ***

ABSTRACT

The subjects of this study are the English Language Teaching (ELT) Prep-classes (day) and the German
Language Teaching (GLT) Prep-classes (day-night) at the Preparatory Class of the School of Foreign
Languages at Ondokuz Mayıs University and the students attending the English Language Teaching Program
(day-night) and the German Language Teaching Program (day-night) in the Department of Foreign
Languages Education at Ondokuz Mayıs University. The subjects of this study are composed of 364 students
( 75 males and 201 females) at English Language department and 212 students ( 40 males and 172 females)
at German Language department (totaly 576 students ). The purpose of this study is to determine the
students’ frequency of language learning strategy use in two language departments in terms of different
variables such as gender, department, types of education program (day-night), grade and types of high school
from which the students have graduated. The data of the research are gathered with “Strategy Inventory for
Language Learning” (SILL) developed by Oxford (1990). The researchers prepared a personal information
part to get information about students’ departments, gender, program types, grade and types of high school
from which they have graduated. The data analysis done by using SPSS 13.0. The results of the study
indicate that English Language Department reported a higher use of compensation strategies on the SILL
than German Language Department. On the other hand, GLT used social strategies more frequently than ELT
department. Both the students at ELT and GLT departments have used metacognitive strategies at high level.
At the end of the study some recommendations for foreign language teachers were made.

Keywords: Language Learning Strategies, Direct Strategies, Indirect Strategies

1. INTRODUCTION
Research into language learning strategies began in the 1960s. Particularly, developments
in cognitive psychology influenced much of the research done on language learning strategies
(Wiliams and Burden 1997:149). In most of the research on language learning strategies, the
primary concern has been on "identifying what good language learners report they do to learn a
second or foreign language, or, in some cases, are observed doing while learning a second or
foreign language" (Rubin and Wenden 1987:19). Learning strategies are defined by Rubin
(1987:23) as ‘’strategies which contribute to the development of language system which the learner
constructs and affect learner directly.’’ According to Oxford, learning strategies are “…. specific
actions taken by the learner to make learning more easier, faster, more enjoyable, more self
directed, more effective and more transferable to new situations”(1989:8). In other words, learning
strategies refer to characteristics we want to stimulate in students to enable them to become more
proficient language learners (Oxford, 1990: 11). Strategies are the tools for active, self-directed

*
Assist.Prof.Dr. Dilek ÇAKICI, Ondokuz Mayıs University,English Language Teaching Department,
[email protected]
**
Research Assist. Adnan OFLAZ, Ondokuz Mayıs University, German Language Teaching Department,
[email protected]

37
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

involvement needed for developing L2 communicative ability (O'Malley and Chamot, 1990).
Research has repeatedly shown that the conscious, tailored use of such strategies is related to
language achievement and proficiency. In addition, Rubin and Wenden view learning strategies as
“behaviours learners engage in to learn and regulate the learning of a second language” (1987:6).

1.1. Taxonomy of Language Learning Strategies

Language Learning Strategies (LLSs) have been classified by many scholars (Wenden and
Rubin 1987; O'Malley et al. 1985; Oxford 1990; Stern 1992, etc.). Rubin’s (1987) classification is
one of the earliest ones; and with the inclusion cognitive, metacognitive, communication and social
strategies. O’Malley et al. (1985) classified LLSs under three categories, metacognitive, cognitive
and socioaffective strategies. O’Malley’s classification of LLSs lacks categories like compensation
and memory strategies to compared with that of Oxford (1990); however they put strategies related
to memory or compensation like inferencing, imagery, keyword, etc. under cognitive strategies.
Stern’s classification (1992) resembles that of Oxford (1990) in that the scopes of categories
overlap notably. However, most of these attempts to classify language learning strategies reflect
more or less the same categorizations of language learning strategies without any radical changes.

1.2. Oxfords’ s (1990) Classification of Language Learning Strategies

Oxford sees the aim of language learning strategies as being oriented towards the
development of communicative competence (1990:9). Oxford divides language learning strategies
into two main groups, direct and indirect, which are further subdivided into 6 groups. Direct
strategies are memory, cognitive, compensation. Indirect strategies: are metacognitive, affective,
social (1990:15).

1.3. Direct Strategies

Direct strategies are those behaviors that directly involve the use of the target language,
which directly facilitates language learning. Oxford (1990) resembles the direct strategies to the
performers in a stage play, whereas she takes after the indirect strategies to the director of the same
play. While the performers work with the language itself, they also work with the director who is
responsible for the organization, guidance, checking, correction, and encouragement of performers.
The categorization of direct language strategies are given as follows (Oxford, 1990):

1.4. Memory Strategies

Memory strategies are based on simple principles like laying things out in order, making
association, and reviewing. These principles are employed when a learner faces challenge of
vocabulary learning. The words and phrases can be associated with visual images that can be stored
and retrieved for communication. Many learners make use of visual images, but some find it easy
to connect words and phrases with sound, motion or touch. The use of memory strategies are most
frequently applied in the beginning process of language learning. As the learners advance to higher
level of proficiency memory strategies are mentioned very little. It is not that the use ceases, but the
awareness of its use becomes less.

38
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

1.5. Cognitive Strategies

Cognitive strategies enable the learner to manipulate the language material in direct ways,
e.g., through reasoning, analysis, note-taking, summarizing, synthesizing, outlining, reorganizing
information to develop stronger schemas (knowledge structures), practicing in naturalistic settings,
and practicing structures and sounds formally. Cognitive strategies were significantly related to L2
proficiency in studies by Oxford, Judd, and Giesen (1998). These are perhaps the most popular
strategies with language learners. The target language is manipulated or transformed by repeating,
analyzing or summarizing. The four sets in this group are: Practicing, Receiving and Sending
Messages, Analyzing and Reasoning, and Creating Structure for Input and Output. Practicing is the
most important in this group which can be achieved by repeating, working with sounds and writing,
and using patterns. The tools of receiving and sending messages are used when learners try to find
the main idea through skimming and scanning. It is not necessary to check every word. The adult
learners commonly use analyzing and reasoning strategies. These are used to understand the
meaning and expression of the target language. These are also used to make new expressions.

1.6. Compensation Strategies

Learners use compensation strategies for comprehension of the target language when they
have insufficient knowledge of the target language. These strategies make up for the deficiency in
grammar and vocabulary. When learners do not know new words and expressions, they guess the
meaning. A learner brings own life experience to interpret data by guessing. Compensation
strategies are also used in production when grammatical knowledge is incomplete. When a learner
does not know the subjunctive form of verb, a different form may be used to convey the message.

1.7. Indirect Language Learning Strategies

Indirect language learning strategies work together with the direct strategies. They help
learner regulate the learning process. These strategies support and manage language learning
without direct engagement and therefore called indirect strategies. The categorization of Indirect
language learning strategies are given as follows:

1.8. Metacognitive Strategies

Metacognitive strategies go beyond the cognitive mechanism and give learners to

coordinate their learning. This helps them to plan language learning in an efficient way. When new
vocabulary, rules, and writing system confuse the learner, these strategies become vital for
successful language learning.
Oxford (1990:136) defines meta-cognitive as ‘’beyond, beside or with the cognitive’’. Three sets of
strategies belong to this group and they are: Centering Your Learning, Arranging and Planning
Your Learning, and Evaluating Your Learning. The aim of centering learning is to give a focus to
the learner so that the attention could be directed toward certain language activities or skills.
Arranging and planning learning help learners to organize so they may get maximum benefit from
their energy and effort. Evaluating learning helps learners with problems like monitoring errors and

39
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

evaluation of progress. Research has found that compared to cognitive strategies metacognitive
strategies are used less consistently by the learners.

1.9. Affective Strategies

Affective refers to emotions, attitudes, motivations and values (Oxford, 1990: 140). The
affective factors like emotion, attitude, motivation, and values influence learning in an important
way. Three sets of strategies are included in this group: Lowering Your Anxiety, Encouraging
Yourself, and Taking Your Emotional Temperature. Good language learners control their attitudes
and emotions about learning and understand that negative feelings retard learning. Teachers can
help generate positive feeling in class by giving students more responsibility, increasing the amount
of natural communication, and teaching affective strategies. Anxiety could be both helpful and
harmful. It is felt that a certain amount of anxiety is helpful for learners because it helps them
obtain their optimum level of performance. Too much anxiety has the opposite effect where it
hinders language learning. Anxiety often takes forms of worry, frustration, insecurity, fear, and
self-doubt. A common high anxiety creating situation for learners is to perform before the peers
and teacher when they are not prepared.

1.10.Social Strategies

Social strategies are very important in learning a language because language is used in
communication and communication occurs between people. Three sets of strategies are included in
this group: Asking Questions, Cooperating with others, and Empathizing with Others.
Among the three, asking questions is the most helpful and comes closest to understanding the
meaning. It also helps in conversation by generating response from the partner and shows interest
and involvement. Cooperation with others eliminates competition and in its place brings group
spirit. Studies show that cooperative learning results in higher self-esteem, increased confidence,
and rapid achievement. Learners do not naturally apply cooperative strategies because of strong
emphasis put on competition by educational institutions. Sometimes competition brings a strong
wish to perform better than others, but it often results in anxiety and fear of failure. It is important
to help learners change their attitudes from confrontation and competition to cooperation. Empathy
is very important in communication. Empathy means to put oneself in someone else’s situation to
understand that person’s point of view. Learners can use social strategies to develop cultural
understanding and become aware of thoughts and feelings of others.

2. METHODOLOGY
2.1.Participants

The subjects of this study were the English Language Teaching (ELT) Prep-classes (day)
and the German Language Teaching (GLT) Prep-classes (day-night) at the Preparatory Class of the
School of Foreign Languages and the students attending the English Language Teaching Program
(day-night) and the German Language Teaching Program (day-night) in the Department of Foreign
Languages Education at Ondokuz Mayis University. The subjects of this study were composed of
364 students (75 males and 201 females) at English Language department and 212 students ( 40
males and 172 females) at German Language department (totally 576 students ).

40
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

2.2.Data Collection and Analysis

The data of the research were gathered with “Strategy Inventory for Language Learning”
(SILL) developed by Oxford (1990). The language of SILL is in English originally. With the aim
of preventing any misunderstandings, Turkish version adapted by Yeşilbursa (2000:78-79) is used
for English language teaching department. Researchers adapted Turkish version of SILL to German
language teaching department in this study. Cronbach alpha reliability coefficient for the scale was
found 0.81. The researchers prepared a personal information part to get information about
students’ departments, gender, program types, grade and types of high school from which they
have graduated. SILL is a 5 point Likert type scale with 50 items. Nine of these items investigate
the use of memory strategies, 14 of them are related to cognitive strategies, 6 of them measure
compensation strategies, 9 of them measure metacognitive strategies, 6 of the items investigates
affective strategies and the last 6 items try to find social strategies.
The data analysis done by using SPSS 13.0. SILL measures a learner’s frequency of strategy use.
Oxford (1990: 300) identified frequency of strategy use as follows: ‘’1,0 – 2,4” refers to the least
frequent , “2,5 – 3,4” refers to less frequent, 3,5 – 5,0” refers to the most frequent.

3. FINDINGS AND DISCUSSIONS

3.1.Participants
Table 1: Participants

F English German

Gender M 75 40

F 289 172

Program 1.Day 201 132

2. Night 163 80

Class Prep 42 57

1.Grade 74 34

2. Grade 84 49

3.Grade 99 39

4.Grade 65 33

High School State High School 73 94

Anatolian High 165 57

School

Super High School 82 57

Anatolian Teacher 44 4
Training High
School

Total (N: 576) 364 212

41
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Table 1 presents the distribution of the participants according to their departments, gender,
types education program, grades and types of high schools from which they have graduated.

3.2. Data Collection and Analysis

Table 2 and Table 3: The Students’ Frequency Of Strategy Use In Terms Of

Department and Gender

Strategies Department N Mean Standart Frequency

x Deviation of Strategy
Use

Memory English 364 3,16 ,552 Medium

German 212 3,11 ,659 Medium

Cognitive English 364 3,40 ,553 Medium

German 212 3,19 ,622 Medium

Compensation English 364 3,69 ,651 High

German 212 3,46 ,725 Medium

Metacognitive English 364 3,63 ,654 High

German 212 3,54 ,738 High

Affective English 364 2,98 ,600 Medium

German 212 2,96 ,528 Medium

Social English 364 3,47 ,775 Medium

German 212 3,50 ,796 High

The results of the study indicated that English language teaching department reported a higher use
of compensation strategies (3.69) on the SILL than German language teaching department (3.46).
On the other hand, GLT used social strategies (3.50) more frequently than ELT (3.47). According
to results of this study, male students in English language teaching department used cognitive
strategies (3.57) more frequently than males in German language department (2.93). As for social
strategies, males in ELT department (3.54) made a greater use than males in GLT department
(3.41) of social strategies. Females in ELT (3.45) used social strategies less frequent than females
in GLT (3.52). As for metacognitive strategies, males in ELT department (3.63) made a greater use
than males in GLT department (3.35).

42
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

English German

Gender N Mean Standart Frequency Gender N Mea Standart Frequency

X Deviati of Strategy n Deviation of Strategy
on Use X Use

Memory Male 75 3,10 ,554 Medium Male 40 2,79 ,617 Medium

Female 289 3,17 ,551 Medium Female 172 3,18 ,659 Medium

Cognitive Male 75 3,57 ,620 High Male 40 2,93 ,610 Medium

Female 289 3,36 ,526 Medium Female 172 3,25 ,622 Medium

Compensation Male 75 3,82 ,638 High Male 40 3,39 ,836 Medium

Female 289 3,66 ,651 High Female 172 3,47 ,725 Medium

Metacognitiv Male 75 3,63 ,689 High Male 40 3,35 ,728 Medium

Female 289 3,64 ,646 High Female 172 3,58 ,738 High

Affective Male 75 2,94 ,642 Medium Male 40 2,71 ,528 Medium

Female 289 2,99 ,590 Medium Female 172 2,70 ,616 Medium

Social Male 75 3,54 ,873 High Male 40 3,41 ,796 Medium

Female 289 3,45 ,748 Medium Female 172 3,52 ,868 High

Table 4: The Students’ Frequency of Strategy Use In Terms Of Education Program

43
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

English German

Program N Standart Frequency Progra Standart Frequenc

Mean Deviation of Strategy m N Mean Deviation y of
X Use X Strategy
Use

Memory Day 20 3,20 ,538 Medium Day 132 3,13 ,661 Medium
1

Night 16 3,10 ,565 Medium Night 80 3,07 ,680 Medium

3

Cognitive Day 20 3,41 ,553 Medium Day 132 3,19 ,649 Medium
1

Night 16 3,39 ,554 Medium Night 80 3,18 ,604 Medium R

3 esult
Compensat Day 20 3,75 ,625 High Day 132 3,43 ,751 Medium s of
ion 1
the
Night 16 3,62 ,676 High Night 80 3,50 ,740 High stud
3
y
Metacognit Day 20 3,70 ,624 High Day 132 3,53 ,794 High indi
ive 1
cate
Night 16 3,55 ,681 High Night 80 3,56 ,647 High
3
d
that
Affective Day 20 2,96 ,607 Medium Day 132 2,97 ,633 Medium
1 day-
Night 16 3,01 ,593 Medium Night 80 2,95 ,577 Medium
time
3 Engl
Social Day 20 3,51 ,767 High Day 132 3,43 ,874 Medium
ish
1 depa
Night 16 3,42 ,785 Medium Night 80 3,61 ,812 High rtme
3 nt
stud
ents (3.75) use compensation strategies more frequently than day time students in German language
department (3.43). On the other hand, there is a difference between the program types and students’
frequency of strategy use. Results showed that English day-time student (3.51) used social
strategies more often than that of German day-time program (3.43). But night time students in GLT
department (3.61) reported a higher use of social strategy than did night ELT department (3.42).

Table 5: The Students’ Frequency of Strategy Use In Terms of High School From
Which They Have Graduated

English German

Frequency
Mea Frequency
Type of Mean Standart of Type of Standart
N n of Strategy
School N X Deviation Strategy School Deviation
X Use
Use

State High State High

73 3,11 ,555 Medium 94 3,15 ,653 Medium
School School

Anatolian Anatolian
165 3,08 ,516 Medium 57 2,95 ,634 Medium
High School High School

Memory Super High Super High

82 3,38 ,617 Medium 57 3,18 ,718 Medium
School School

Anatolian Anatolian
Teacher Teacher
44 3,19 ,483 Medium 4 3,50 ,410 High
Training Training
High School High School

44
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

State High State High

73 3,47 ,502 Medium 94 3,21 ,627 Medium
School School

Anatolian Anatolian
165 3,37 ,547 Medium 57 3,15 ,594 Medium
High School High School
Cognitiv
Super High Super High
e 82 3,43 ,629 Medium 57 3,17 ,691 Medium
School School

Anatolian Anatolian
Teacher Teacher
44 3,38 ,508 Medium 4 3,55 ,326 High
Training Training
High School High School

State High State High

73 3,59 ,692 High 94 3,41 ,731 Medium
School School

Anatolian Anatolian
165 3,66 ,623 High 57 3,40 ,748 Medium
High School High School
Compens
Super High Super High
ation 82 3,83 ,710 High 57 3,54 ,770 High
School School

Anatolian Anatolian
Teacher Teacher
44 3,70 ,532 High 4 4,12 ,416 High
Training Training
High School High School

This study showed that graduates of Anatolian teacher training high school in ELT
department used cognitive strategies (3.38) less frequently than that of in GLT department (3.55). On
the other hand, State high school graduates in ELT department (3.54) use social strategies more
frequently than that of GLT department (3.45). In addition, it is found that a greater use of social
strategy by Super high school graduates in GLT department (3.64).

Table 6: The Students’ Frequency of Strategy Use In Terms Of Their Grades

English German

Frequency
Frequency
Mean Standart Mean Standart of
Grade N of Strategy Grade N
X Deviation X Deviation Strategy
Use
Use

Prep. 42 3,06 ,515 Medium Prep. 57 3,10 ,609 Medium

1.Grade 74 3,09 ,500 Medium 1.Grade 34 2,98 ,746 Medium

Memory 2.Grade 84 3,04 ,536 Medium 2.Grade 49 3,34 ,595 Medium

3.Grade 99 3,19 ,584 Medium 3.Grade 39 3,07 ,728 Medium

4.Grade 65 3,39 ,537 Medium 4.Grade 33 2,97 ,660 Medium

Prep. 42 3,36 ,536 Medium Prep. 57 3,27 ,576 Medium

1.Grade 74 3,41 ,481 Medium 1.Grade 34 3,25 ,714 Medium

Cognitive 2.Grade 84 3,40 641 Medium 2.Grade 49 3,26 ,642 Medium

3.Grade 99 3,38 ,529 Medium 3.Grade 39 3,05 ,583 Medium

4.Grade 65 3,47 ,563 Medium 4.Grade 33 3,04 ,657 Medium

Prep. 42 3,67 ,717 High Prep. 57 3,42 ,728 Medium

Compensation
1.Grade 74 3,50 687 High 1.Grade 34 3,53 ,708 High

45
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

2.Grade 84 3,62 ,615 High 2.Grade 49 3,52 ,824 High

3.Grade 99 3,72 ,618 High 3.Grade 39 3,40 ,691 Medium

4.Grade 65 3,96 ,581 High 4.Grade 33 3,43 ,786 Medium

English German

Grade N Standart Frequency Grade N Standart Frequency

Mean Deviation of Strategy Mean Deviation of Strategy
X Use X Use

Meta Prep. 42 3,71 ,515 High Prep. 57 3,73 ,653 High

Cognitive
1.Grade 74 3,64 ,500 High 1.Grade 34 3,70 ,876 High

2.Grade 84 3,61 ,536 High 2.Grade 49 3,56 ,655 High

3.Grade 99 3,60 ,584 High 3.Grade 39 3,47 ,601 Medium

4.Grade 65 3,65 ,537 High 4.Grade 33 3,11 ,844 Medium

Affective Prep. 42 2,92 ,536 Medium Prep. 57 3,11 ,615 Medium

1.Grade 74 3,00 ,481 Medium 1.Grade 34 2,91 ,708 Medium

2.Grade 84 2,97 641 Medium 2.Grade 49 3,03 ,562 Medium

3.Grade 99 3,05 ,529 Medium 3.Grade 39 2,84 ,546 Medium

4.Grade 65 2,90 ,563 Medium 4.Grade 33 2,78 ,595 Medium

Social Prep. 42 3,47 ,717 Medium Prep. 57 3,58 ,829 High

1.Grade 74 3,56 687 High 1.Grade 34 3,50 ,857 High

2.Grade 84 3,38 ,615 Medium 2.Grade 49 3,65 ,768 High

3.Grade 99 3,48 ,618 Medium 3.Grade 39 3,35 ,872 Medium

4.Grade 65 3,47 ,581 Medium 4.Grade 33 3,30 ,972 Medium

46
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

According to results of the study, ELT Prep classes (3.67) made a greater use than GLT
classes (3.42) of compensation strategies. Also the third (3.72) and fourth grade (3.40) students in
ELT department used compensation strategies more often than the third grade (3.40) fourth grade
(3.43) students in GLT department.

Interestingly, both third (3.72) and fourth (3.96) graders in ELT department used
compensation strategies more frequently than the third grade (3.40) and fourth grade students
(3.43) in GLT department. On the other hand, results indicates the superiority of GLT Prep-classes
(3.58) and second grade students ( 3.65) to ELT prep-classes ( 3.47) and second grade students
(3.38) in the use of social strategies.

4. CONCLUSION AND SUGGESTIONS

The results of the study indicate that English Language Department reported a higher use of
compensation strategies on the SILL than German Language Department. On the other hand, GLT
used social strategies more frequently than ELT department. Both the students at ELT and GLT
departments have problems with the use of affective strategies and social strategies frequently. To
handle that problem, the teachers should strengthen the students’ social strategies preparing group
and peer activities, motivating cooperative working, giving chance the students to take
responsibility with peers and groups, providing active participation in the lesson. As for affective
strategy, high anxiety is a big problem for language learners especially for oral skills (Oxford,
1990). Using progressive relation, deep breathing or mediation, using music, using humour and
laughter are specific and effective strategies to deal with emotional problems that may arise during
learning process. Teachers should train learners to use these strategies efficiently. According to the
result of this study, almost all students from each department do not use affective strategies
frequently. Teachers should create stress-free learning environment and generate positive feeling in
class by giving students more responsibility, increasing the amount of natural communication and
teaching affective strategies.

According to results of the study, male students in ELT used cognitive strategies more
frequently than their female counterparts. Also it is found that a much more frequent use of
compensation strategies by males. Compensation strategies are used to overcome problematic
situation when the learners meet this matter. They should use strategies like avoiding
communication, using mime and gesture, guessing intelligently etc. The students should be
encouraged to use compensation strategies and related activities should be designed. In this study
males in ELT department made a greater use than females of social strategies. The teacher should
encourage learners to work in groups and with their peers to share their ideas In the present study,
the males in ELT department used cognitive strategies at high level but males in GLT department
are less user of cognitive strategies. As for metacognitive strategies, both females and males in
ELT department made a greater use than females and males in GLT department. In terms of
metacognitive strategies, the learners should be trained how to raise their awareness about
metacognitive strategies. Metacognitive strategies are especially crucial in that students will find
the direction of their learning with them. The language teachers should encourage the students to
use metacognitive strategies. For example, before having students start activity, the teacher may

47
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

demonstrate the think-aloud technique, modeling how the activity can be done, or the students can
have a group discussion about how to accomplish the activity and what to learn from it. It is also
effective to discuss how students have engaged in a language activity after they finish it. How
teachers present language activities are closely related to students’ development of those
metacognitive strategies. As for compensation strategies are used to overcome problematic
situation when the learners meet this matter. They should use strategies like avoiding
communication, using mime and gesture, guessing intelligently etc. The students should be
encouraged to use compensation strategies and related activities should be designed.

Results of the study indicate that day-time ELT department students use compensation
strategies more frequently than GLT day-time students. The reason for this conclusion may be the
fact that ELT students may be afraid of making pronunciation mistake while speaking as they learn
English as a foreign language. Also, it is widely accepted that the students in GLT department
acquired German as most of the students were born in Germany. On the other hand, ELT day-time
students used social strategies more often than that of GLT day-time program. Another difference
between two departments in terms of education program is that night students in GLT department
reported a higher use of social strategy than did night ELT program.

According to results of the present study, graduates of Anatolian teacher training high
school in ELT department used cognitive strategies less frequently than that of in GLT Department.
On the other hand, State high school graduates in ELT department used social strategies more
frequently than that of GLT department. In addition, it is found that a greater use of social
strategies by Super high school in GLT department. The results also indicate that ELT prep class
students, third and fourth class students are high level user of compensation strategies. Especially,
fourth grade students use compensation strategies at the highest level. It is known that when
language related difficulties arise, compensation strategies like avoiding communication, using
mime and gesture can be employed. The reasons why the fourth year students need to use
compensation strategies frequently should be examined. Feeling upset, anxious and demotivated
may cause some problems in language learning process. Being a fourth class student is a
threatening factor in itself. On the other hand, results show the superiority of GLT prep-classes and
second grade students in the use of social strategies.

In conclusion, in order to provide permanent and effective learning, teachers should make
use of language learning strategies. Teachers should gain great deal of knowledge and skill about
language learning strategies. The teachers should discover their own strategies, consider new ones,
learn how to model and teach them, have many opportunities to practice and evaluate teaching
techniques and methods, and plan how they will integrate strategy-based instruction into
curriculum. Besides, foreign language departments should determine and adopt an inclusive point
of view as to language learning strategies and help prospective foreign language teachers to have
an adequate awareness about necessity and use of strategy based instruction. More highly
motivated learners use a significantly greater range of appropriate strategies than do less motivated
learners. Motivation is related to language learning purpose, which is another key to strategy use.
For instance, individuals who want to learn a new language mainly a new language merely to fulfill
a graduation requirement, the learners should be trained to assess themselves objectively.

REFERENCES

O'Malley, J.M., and & Chamot, A.U. (1990). Learning strategies in second language acquisition.
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

O’Malley. J. and Chamot, A. U. (1994). Learning Strategies in Second Language Acquisition.

Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

48
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Oxford, R. (1990). Language Learning Strategies: What every teacher should know. Boston, MA:
Heinle & Heinle

Rubin, J. and Wenden, A. (1987) Learner Strategies In Language Learning. Englewoods Hill, NJ:
Prentice Hall

Williams, M. and Robert L. Burden (1997). Psychology for Language Teachers: A Social
Constructivist Approach. Cambridge: CUP.

Willing, K. (1987) Language Strategies as information Management. Prentice Hall International

49
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”
November 15-17, 2012 SAMSUN

PROFESSIONAL SELF-ESTEEM AS A PREDICTOR OF TEACHER BURNOUT

ACROSS IRANIAN AND TURKISH EFL TEACHERS*

Ebrahim KHEZERLOU**

ABSTRACT

The study aimed at measuring the perceived burnout levels of Iranian (N= 230) and Turkish
(N=156) EFL teachers and determining the cross-cultural role of Professional Self-esteem in predicting EE,
DP, and PA processes of burnout across Iranian and Turkish EFL teachers. The MBI-ES was used to measure
the perceived burnout levels of the participants, and a self-developed a Professional Self-esteem Scale (16
items) was developed to measure the participants’ self-esteem perceptions in five dimensions of satisfaction,
knowledge development, practice, adaptation and communication. The internal reliability of the 16-item
scale was r = 0.821. The results showed that there was a slight significant difference between Iranian and
Turkish groups only in EE burnout processes. Moreover, EE, DP, and PA subscales were better predicted by
Satisfaction, Practice, and Knowledge Development dimensions of Professional Self-esteem in the case of
both Iranian and Turkish teachers, respectively. Finally, the EE and PA prediction variances of Iranian group
were greater than that of Turkish one; whereas, the DP prediction variance of Turkish group was greater than
that of Iranian one.

Keywords: Burnout; MBI-ES; Professional Self-esteem; EFL Teachers; Iran; Turkey.

1. INTRODUCTION
Burnout describes emotional depletion, motivational loss and commitment reduction
experienced by human service workers after prolonged and extensive stress conditions (Soderfelt
and Soderfelt, 1995). Maslach and Jackson (1981) defined burnout as “a syndrome of emotional
exhaustion and cynicism that occurs frequently among individuals who do ‘people-work’ of some
kind” (p. 99).
The study tries to indicate that self-esteem is an important factor in predicting who will be
more likely to develop burnout, and it also tries to suggest the importance of rebuilding self-esteem
as part of the rehabilitation of burned-out employees. Therefore, the general purpose of the study is
to explore how Iranian and Turkish secondary EFL teachers’ evaluation of their profession is
related to EE, DP, and PA burnout processes in the areas of (a) Professional Satisfaction (positive
regards of teachers to teaching and their work), (b) Professional Knowledge Development
(teachers’ desire to develop skills necessary in their job), (c) Professional Practice (a sense of
preparing for the work and performing a qualified work), (d) Professional Adaptation (feeling of
adapting oneself to new work conditions to overcome challenges and problems in the workplace),
and (e) Professional Communication (teachers’ desire to impart and share their knowledge,
information, and experience to and with others). Hence, the paper aims at finding answers to the
following research questions:
1. What is the perceived level of job burnout for Iranian and Turkish secondary EFL
teachers in reference to the three-factor structure of the MBI-ES (i.e. EE, DP, and PA subscales)?

*
The study is a part of my Ph.D. dissertation submitted to English Dept. at Hacettepe University.
**
Assist. Prof. Dr., Mevlana University, [email protected].

50
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

2. Are there significant relationships between Iranian and Turkish EFL teachers’ EE, DP
and PA burnout levels while taking into their nationality?
3. Which dimensions of the professional self-esteem scale better predict the EE, DP, and
PA burnout subscales across Iranian and Turkish teachers?
4. To what extent do the dimensions of the professional self-esteem scale account for the
prediction variance of EE, DP, and PA subscales across Iranian and Turkish teachers?

2. REVIEW OF LITERATURE
2.1. Theoretical Framework
Maslach and Jackson (1981) put forward the most widely accepted conceptualization of
burnout that has three dimensions: emotional exhaustion (EE) referring to feelings of being
emotionally drained by intense contact with other people, depersonalization (DP) referring to
negative attitudes or callous responses toward people, and reduced personal accomplishment (PA)
referring to a decline in one’s sense of competence and of successful achievement in working with
people (Maslach, 1982; Maslach and Leiter, 1997; Maslach, Schaufeli and Leiter, 2001).
Burnout among teachers has been associated with many factors. One of them is
‘professional self-esteem’ which is generally defined as a global self-evaluation. In other words, it
indicates the extent to which an individual believes the self to be capable, significant, successful
and worthy. Psychologically, it is a state of mind that prepares the person to respond according to
expectations of success, acceptance, and personal strength (Rosse et al., 1991; Harter, 1999; Hoyle
et al., 1999; Leary and McDonald, 2003). Professional self-esteem describes the importance and
value one attaches to one’s profession and is related to professional adaptation and satisfaction
(Koc, 1994; Aricak and Dilmac, 2003).
It has been argued that individuals with low self-esteem are emotionally more vulnerable
and interact less adequately with others in their workplace. Therefore, people with low self-esteem
are probably more susceptible to burnout. As Rosse et al (1991) posit that individuals with low
self-esteem tend to be less effective in interpersonal relationships. They may be predisposed both to
depersonalize people and to experience feelings of incompetence in their relationships with others.
They may also have fewer resources to help them to cope with these feelings as well as with other
stressors that produce burnout. Furthermore, individuals with low self-esteem tend to be extremely
dependent on others for validation, thus, making them particularly vulnerable in the emotionally
charged environments that are characteristic of burnout. Perception of high self-esteem, on the
other hand, has been associated with positive characteristics such as initiative, strong coping skills,
feelings of confidence, feeling of worthiness, persistence in the face of challenges, feeling of
positive regard about oneself, feeling of happiness, and longevity (Baumeister et al., 2003).
Moreover, people with high self-esteem feel good about themselves, feel a sense of belonging and
security, and respect and appreciate others. They also tend to be successful in life because they feel
confident in taking on challenges and risking failure to achieve what they want (Janssen et al.,
1999).
2.2. Relevant Studies
There exists some evidence that self-esteem is related to burnout. In their study of self-
esteem as an antecedent, moderator, or consequence of employee burnout among police officers (N
= 1,163) and hospital employees (N = 494), Rosse et al (1991) reported significant correlations
between self-esteem and all three burnout dimensions (i.e., EE, DP, and PA). Moreover,
Golembiewski and Kim (1989) found that self-esteem acts both as an antecedent and as an effect of
burnout. Furthermore, Villa and Calvete (2001) studied teacher self-esteem in relation to burnout
among secondary school teachers (n=278). The results of their study showed that teachers with
positive self-esteem believed that they were able to influence their students and experienced lower

51
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

level of burnout, while teachers with negative self-esteem were found to perceive dissatisfaction
with their job. Finally, Cowin (2001) found that low self-esteem among nurses implicated in high
stress, increased burnout, attrition and low professional status.

3. METHODOLOGY
3.1. Participants
The participants were Iranian (N=230) and Turkish (N=156) teachers teaching English as a
foreign language in state high schools during 2011-2012 academic year. The data for the study
were collected from North West provinces of Iran (East Azerbaijan, West Azerbaijan, Erdebil,
Zenjan, Kazvin, and Tehran) and four city regions of Ankara (Mamak, Çankaya, Altındağ, and
Balgat) in Turkey.
3.2. Data Collection and Analysis
The Maslach Burnout Inventory-Educators Survey (MBI-ES) was employed to measure
self-perceived burnout levels of the participants through 22 items in three dimensions of EE, DP
and PA. The internal reliability of these dimensions was checked in the study: EE (α= 0.882), DP
(α= 0.722), and PA (α= 0.745). Additionally, a self-developed Professional Self-esteem Scale (16
items) was employed to measure the participants’ self-esteem perceptions in five dimensions of (a)
satisfaction = 2 items (e.g., “I’m pretty happy with my job”), (b) knowledge development = 4 items
(e.g., “I am enthusiastic to learn new skills necessary to my work”), (c) practice = 4 items (e.g., “I
am a teacher who prepares very well for the work I do”), (d) adaptation = 4 items (e.g., “I can make
up my mind without too much trouble for changes in my work”), and (e) communication = 2 items
(e.g., “I am able and eager to impart what I know to others”). The internal consistency reliability of
the 16-item scale was r = 0.821. The collected data were entered into the SPSS version 17.0 for
Windows for analysis. Descriptive and inferential statistics such as per cent, mean, t-test, ANOVA,
and standard multiple regression were used for determining and explaining burnout levels of
Iranian and Turkish Teachers.

4. FINDINGS AND DISCUSSION

4.1. Findings
4.1.1. General Burnout Perceptions of Iranian and Turkish Teachers
Maslach, Jackson, and Leiter (1996) suggested three score cut-off points for each burnout
subscale (See Table 1), where high scores for EE and DP subscales along with low scores for PA
subscale indicate greater feelings of burnout. Based on this model, the results of descriptive
statistics for burnout perceptions of Iranian teachers in the three subscales of EE, DP and PA were
as: EE (Low=50.0 %, Moderate=21.3 %, and High= 28.7 %), DP (Low=56.5 %, Moderate= 22.2
%, and High= 21.3 %), and PA (Low= 29.1 %, Moderate=27.0 %, and High= 43.9 %), while for
Turkish teachers they were as: EE (Low= 28.8 %, Moderate=32.7 %, and High= 38.5 %), DP
(Low= 44.9 %, Moderate=34.0 %, and High= 21.2%), and PA (Low=27.6 %, Moderate=32.7 %,
and High= 39.7 %). See Table 2.
Table 1: Score Categories of Burnout Subscales

Subscales Range Low Moderate High

Emotional Exhaustion (EE) 0-54 0 – 16 17 – 26 27 and over

Depersonalization (DP) 0-30 0–6 7 – 12 13 and over
Personal Accomplishment (PA)* 0-48 39 and over 32 – 38 0 - 31

*Indicating the positively-worded subscale

(Maslach, Jackson, and Leiter, 1996)

52
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

The summative burnout scores of the participants were also computed here. Scores were
considered ‘high’ if they were within the 25% of high scores of the total range (0-132), ‘moderate’
if they were within the 50% of middle scores of the total range, and ‘low’ if they were within the
25% of low scores of the total range. Based on this self-developed cut-off points, the results of
Iranian teachers’ overall burnout were as: (Low=38.3 %, Moderate=60.0 % and High= 1.7 %) and
for Turkish teachers were as (Low=23.7 %, Moderate= 74.4 % and High= 1.9 %). See Table 2.
Table 2: Frequency and Percentage of Iranian and Turkish Teachers’ Burnout Perceptions

Subscales Observed
Ranges Low Moderate High
Ir. Tr. Ir. Tr. Ir. Tr. Ir. Tr.
F % F % F % F % F % F %
EE 0-48 2-53 115 50.0 45 28.8 49 21.3 51 32.7 66 28.7 60 38.5

DP 0-27 0-24 130 56.5 70 44.9 51 22.2 53 34.0 49 21.3 33 21.2

PA* 10-48 13-48 67 29.1 43 27.6 62 27.0 51 32.7 101 43.9 62 39.7

Overall 1-99 7-104 88 38.3 37 23.7 138 60.0 116 74.4 4 1.7 3 1.9
Burnout**
(N Ir. =230, 100% & N Tr. =156, 100%)
*The scores of this subscale were reversed to calculate the summative score of burnout.
** The cut-off points belong to the researcher (Low= 0-32, Moderate= 33-87, High= 88-132).
4.1.2. Nationality and burnout subscales
There was statistically a significant difference between Iranian (N = 230; 59.6 %) and
Turkish (N = 156; 40.4 %) EFL teachers’ perceptions on burnout only in the subscale of EE (t = -
3.36; P = 0.001, P< 0.05). However, no significant differences were observed between the groups
in the subscales of DP (t = -1.00; P = 0.316, P> 0.05) and PA (t = -.42; P = 0.674, P> 0.05) because
their P-values were more than 0.05. See Table 3.
Table 3: Nationality and Teacher Burnout

Burnout Group statistics t-test

Subscales Std. Sig. Eta
Nationality N Mean Deviation t df (2-tailed) square
1. EE Iranian 230 19.53 12.49197
Turkish 156 23.57 10.94505 -3.365 359.79 .001 .0286
Total 386
2. DP Iranian 230 7.42 6.30661
Turkish 156 8.02 5.31640 -1.004 366.25 .316 -
Total 386
3. PA Iranian 230 32.76 8.57242
Turkish 156 33.10 7.46102 -.421 360.96 .674 -
Total 386

Moreover, ‘Effect Size’ statistic based on the ‘Eta Square’ value (ƞ2) of Cohen (1988)
indicated a slight significant difference for Iranian and Turkish groups in the EE subscale (ƞ2=
0.0286; ƞ2 < 0.059). Cohen’s (1988) effect size indexes for the ratio of variance between the
dependent and independent variables are as: small=0.01to 0.059, medium = 0.06 to 0.139 and large
= 0.14 to 1. It is computed through the ‘ƞ2= t2/t2 + (N1-N2-2)’ formula for t-tests. See Table 3.

53
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

4.1.3. Professional Self-esteem as a Predictor of Burnout across Iranian and Turkish

Teachers
The results of multiple stepwise-method regression analyses for determining the role of the
five dimensions of Professional Self-esteem in predicting EE burnout subscale across Iranian and
Turkish teachers revealed that there was significant linear relationship between the EE subscale and
Professional Self-esteem dimensions of Satisfaction (t = -12.337; P = .000, P< 0.05) and
Adaptation (t = -4.975; P = .000, P< 0.05) in the case of Iranian participants and between the EE
subscale and Professional Self-esteem dimensions of Satisfaction (t = -5.947; P = .000, P< 0.05),
Practice (t = -3.134; P = .000, P< 0.05) and Communication (t = 2.036; P = .043, P< 0.05) in the
case of Turkish participants. See Table 4.
Table 4: Coefficients of EE Subscale and Professional Self-esteem across Ir. & Tr.
Groups

Subscales Ir. Tr.

Beta t Sig. R2 Beta t Sig. R2
1. Satisfaction -.603 -12.337 .000 .350 -.439 -5.947 .000 .158
2. Knowledge Development -.019 -.349 .727 - .088 .892 .374 -
3. Practice -.017 -.301 .763 - -.249 -3.134 .002 .044
4. Adaptation -.243 -4.975 .000 .057 -.063 -.781 .436 -
5. Communication .044 .863 .389 - .148 2.036 .043 .019
2 2
Sig. subscales Total R = .477 Total R = .323

The results also showed that the significant dimensions of EE accounted for 47.7 per cent
of the subscale’s total prediction variance in the case of Iranian participants and 32.3 per cent in the
case of Turkish ones. Moreover, Satisfaction was the strongest predictor of EE subscale among
Iranian and Turkish teachers (Iranian ►t = -12.337, Beta = -.603 and Turkish ►t = -5.947, Beta = -
.439), while the weakest predictor of EE among Iranian teachers was Practice (t = -.301, Beta = -
.017) and among Turkish teachers was Adaptation (t = -.781, Beta = -.063). See Table 4.
Moreover, the results of multiple stepwise-method regression analyses represented that
there was significant linear relationship between the DP subscale and Professional Self-esteem
dimensions of Practice (t = -4.990; P = .000, P< 0.05), Adaptation (t = -2.761; P = .006, P< 0.05),
and Communication (t = -2.334; P = .020, P< 0.05) in the case of Iranian participants and between
the DP subscale and Professional Self-esteem dimensions of Satisfaction (t = -4.371; P = .000, P<
0.05), Practice (t = -4.077; P = .000, P< 0.05), and Communication (t = -2.905; P = .004, P< 0.05)
in the case of Turkish participants. See Table 5.
Table 5: Coefficients of DP Subscale and Professional Self-esteem across Ir. & Tr.
Groups

Subscales Ir. Tr.

Beta t Sig. R2 Beta t Sig. R2
1. Satisfaction -.117 -1.877 .062 - -.309 -4.371 .000 .078
2. Knowledge Development -.062 -.853 .394 - -.083 -.875 .383 -
3. Practice -.321 -4.990 .000 .082 -.310 -4.077 .000 .067
4. Adaptation -.178 -2.761 .006 .025 -.140 -1.844 .067 -
5. Communication -.148 -2.334 .020 .018 -.202 -2.905 .004 .034
2 2
Sig. subscales Total R = .253 Total R = .381

54
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

The results also demonstrated that the significant dimensions of DP in the case of Iranian
participants explained 25.3 per cent of the subscale’s total variance, while the significant
dimensions of DP in the case of Turkish participants explained 38.1 per cent of the subscale’s total
prediction variance. Moreover, Practice was the strongest predictor of DP among Iranian and
Turkish teachers (Iranian ►t = -4.990, Beta = -.321 and Turkish ►t = -4.077, Beta = -.310),
whereas the weakest predictor of DP among them was Knowledge Development (Iranian ►t = -
.853, Beta = -.062 and Turkish ►t = -.875, Beta = -.083). See Table 5.
Finally, the results of multiple stepwise-method regression analyses disclosed that there
was significant linear relationship between the PA subscale and Professional Self-esteem
dimensions of Satisfaction (t = 3.898; P = .000, P< 0.05), Knowledge Development (t = 5.363; P =
.000, P< 0.05), and Practice (t = 4.298; P = .000, P< 0.05) in the case of Iranian participants and
between the PA subscale and Professional Self-esteem dimensions of Satisfaction (t = 3.566; P =
.000, P< 0.05) and Knowledge Development (t = 7.346; P = .000, P< 0.05) in the case of Turkish
participants. See Table 6.
Table 6: Coefficients of PA Subscale and Professional Self-esteem across Ir. & Tr.
Groups

Subscales Ir. Tr.

Beta t Sig. R2 Beta t Sig. R2
1. Satisfaction .221 3.898 .000 .041 .239 3.566 .000 .053
2. Knowledge Development .320 5.363 .000 .077 .492 7.346 .000 .228
3. Practice .268 4.298 .000 .050 .140 1.600 .112 -
4. Adaptation .070 1.177 .240 - .128 1.742 .084 -
5. Communication .039 .663 .508 - .138 1.672 .097 -
2 2
Sig. subscales Total R = .392 Total R = .355

The results also revealed that the significant dimensions of PA explained 39.2 per cent of
the subscale’s total prediction variance in the case of Iranian participants and 35.5 per cent in the
case of Turkish ones. Moreover, Knowledge Development was the strongest predictor of PA
subscale among both Iranian and Turkish teachers (Iranian ►t = 5.363, Beta = .320; Turkish ► t =
7.346, Beta = .492), whereas the weakest predictor of PA among Iranian teachers was
Communication (t = .663, Beta = .039) and among Turkish teachers was Adaptation (t = 1.742,
Beta = .128). See Table 6.
4.2. Discussion
The significant findings are discussed here to find answers to the four research questions
which were the objectives of this study. The percentage scores of EE, DP and PA subscales
revealed that Turkish teachers perceive more EE burnout than Iranian teachers (High Level ► Ir. =
28.7 %; High► Tr. = 38.5 %), Iranian teachers perceive more PA than Turkish teachers (High
Level ►Ir. = 43.9 %; High ►Tr. = 39.7 %), and Iranian and Turkish teachers perceive DP burnout
almost equally (High Level ►Ir. = 21.3 %; High Level ►Tr. = 21.2 %). This implies that Turkish
teachers feel more drained from their job emotionally than Iranian teaches because of feeling
emotional exhaustion, Iranian teachers sense more competence than Turkish teachers and also
achieve more successful results from working with their students, but they feel cynical toward
their students almost equally (research question one).
However, the results of t-test analyses for determining significant differences between
Iranian and Turkish teachers’ burnout levels in reference to the three-factor structure of the MBI-
ES (research question two) revealed that there was statistically slight significant difference between
the groups only in the subscale of EE, but not in the subscales of DP and PA. The mean scores of

55
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Iranian (Mean= 20.45) and Turkish (Mean= 23.70) teachers showed that the Turkish teachers’
scores were greater than that of Iranian ones. As with the percentage results, it implies that Turkish
teachers feel emotionally drained from their job and are unable to give of themselves
psychologically more than that of Iranian teachers. This may be attributed to the demanding EFL
programs in Turkish context or Turkish teachers’ lack of seriousness in taking responsibility for the
work they do because Turkish teachers offer 15-hour obligatory teaching per week, while Iranian
teachers offer 24-hour obligatory teaching per week with a low amount of salary than that of
Turkish teachers.
With regard to which dimensions of Professional Self-esteem better predict the EE, DP,
and PA burnout processes across Iranian and Turkish teachers (research question three), the
findings demonstrated that EE subscale of burnout is better predicted by the Satisfaction dimension
of Professional Self-esteem in the case of Iranian and Turkish teachers (Iranian Beta= -.603 and
Turkish Beta = -.439). This means that Iranian and Turkish teachers are emotionally drained from
their job mainly as a result of not possessing positive regards toward their work. Moreover, Iranian
teachers’ lack of desire to develop skills necessary in their job also depletes them emotionally, and
Turkish teachers’ lack of desire to prepare themselves well for their work and to impart their
knowledge, information, and experience to others lead them to emotional exhaustion. Therefore, to
deal with EE burnout among Iranian and Turkish teachers, they should principally be encouraged
to increase their satisfaction in their job through meeting their desires and needs. Additionally,
Iranian teachers should specifically be motivated to adopt and adapt to new work conditions to
overcome emotional exhaustion, and Turkish teachers should specifically be motivated to prepare
themselves for their work for a qualified work performance and to impart and share their
knowledge, information, and experience to and with the students and colleagues to the same end.
Furthermore, the results disclosed that DP subscale of burnout is better predicted by the
Practice dimension of Professional Self-esteem in the case of Iranian and Turkish teachers (Iranian
Beta = -.321 and Turkish Beta = -.310). That is to say that Iranian and Turkish teachers commit
student depersonalization mainly as a result of not preparing themselves for their work well.
Moreover, Iranian and Turkish teachers do not care for their students adequately for not being able
to or lack of desire to share their knowledge, information, and experience with them. Further, lack
of enough job satisfaction among Turkish teachers and work-condition adaptation among Iranian
teaches causes them to commit student depersonalization. To avoid or control DP burnout among
Iranian and Turkish teachers, however, they should mainly be motivated to perform a qualified
work through preparing themselves well for their classes. Moreover, Iranian teachers should
specifically be helped in adopting and adapting to new work conditions and sharing their
knowledge and experience with their students to get away from student depersonalization, and
Turkish teachers should also specifically be helped in increasing their job satisfaction and
imparting their knowledge, information, and experience to their students for the same reason.
Finally, the results revealed that PA subscale of burnout is better predicted by the
Knowledge Development dimension of Professional Self-esteem in the case of both Iranian and
Turkish teachers (Iranian Beta= .320 and Turkish Beta = .492). This means that Iranian and Turkish
teachers’ lack of desire to develop skills necessary in their job mainly affects their work
accomplishment and performance. Further, Turkish teachers’ work performance is specifically
affected as a result of job dissatisfaction, and Iranian teachers’ as a result of job dissatisfaction and
poor work preparedness. Therefore, to combat PA burnout among both Iranian and Turkish
teachers, they should mainly be encouraged to develop necessary work skills. Moreover, job
satisfaction should also be increased among both Iranian and Turkish teachers so that they could be
encouraged to develop their teaching activities and work performance. Finally, Iranian teachers
should specifically be helped in accomplishing a qualified work.
In short, regarding the prediction variance of EE, DP, and PA subscales by the dimensions
of the professional self-esteem scale across Iranian and Turkish teachers (research question four),

56
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

the results released that the significant dimensions of EE, DP, and PA subscales accounted for 47.7,
25.3, and 39.2 per cent of each subscale’s total prediction variance in the case of Iranian
participants and 32.3, 38.1, and 35.5 per cent in the case of Turkish participants, respectively. As
shown, the EE and PA prediction variances of Iranian group were greater than that of Turkish one,
that is, Iranian teachers’ emotional exhaustion and work accomplishment perceptions were more
than that of Turkish teachers as the result of the involved dimensions of the professional self-
esteem, respectively; whereas, the DP prediction variance of Turkish group was greater than that of
Iranian one, i.e., Turkish teachers committed student depersonalization more than Iranian teachers
as the result of the involved dimensions of the professional self-esteem.

5. CONCLUSION AND SUGGESTIONS

The aim of this study was to measure the perceived EE, DP, and PA burnout levels of
Iranian and Turkish teachers and to explore which of these burnout processes is better predicted by
the dimensions of a Professional Self-esteem Scale in the areas of (a) Satisfaction, (b) Knowledge
Development, (c) Practice, (d) Adaptation, and (e) Communication across Iranian and Turkish
teachers. The results revealed that there was a slight difference between Iranian and Turkish
teachers in the EE subscale. Moreover, EE, DP, and PA subscales were better predicted by
Satisfaction, Practice, and Knowledge Development dimensions of Professional Self-esteem in the
case of both Iranian and Turkish teachers, respectively. Finally, the EE and PA prediction variances
of Iranian group were greater than that of Turkish one; whereas, the DP prediction variance of
Turkish group was greater than that of Iranian one. However, these findings may especially be
beneficial to policy makers, program designers, and language practitioner.

57
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

REFERENCES
Aricak, T., and Dilmac, B. (2003). An Investigation of Self-esteem and Vocational Self-
esteem of Counseling Guidance Students. Trakya University Journal of Social
Science, 3(1), 111-23.
Baumeister, R. F., Campbell, J. K., Krueger, J. I. and Vohs, K. D. (2003). Does High
Self-esteem Cause Better Performance, Interpersonal Success, Happiness, or
Healthier Lifestyles? Psychological Science Public Interest, No: 4, 1-44.
Cowin, L. S. (2001). Measuring Nurses’ Self-concept. Western Journal of Nursing
research, 23(3), 313-325.
Cohen, J. W. (1988). Statistical Power Analysis for the Behavioral Sciences (2nd Ed.)
Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Golembiewski, R.T., and Kim, B. (1989). Self-esteem and Phases of Burnout.
Organization Development Journal, No: 7, 51- 58.
Harter, S. (1999). The Construction of the Self: A Developmental Perspective. New
York: Guilford Press.
Hoyle, R., Kernis, M. H., Leary, M. R. and Baldwin, M. W. (1999). Selfhood: Identity,
Esteem, Control. Boulder, Westwood.
Janssen, P. P. M., Schaufelioe, W. B. and Houkes, I. (1999). Work-related and
Individual Determinants of the Three Burnout Dimensions. Work and Stress, 13: 1,
74-86.
Koc, M. (1994). Factors Affecting Vocation Choices of Karadeniz Technical University
Fatih Education Faculty First-year Students. Modern Education Journal, 204, 27-30.
Leary, M. R., McDonald, G. (2003). Individual Differences in Self-esteem: a Review
and Theoretical Integration. In M. R. Leary and P.J. Tangney (Eds.), Handbook of
Self and Identity. New York: Guilford Press.
Maslach, C. (1982). Burnout: The Cost of Caring. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
Maslach, C. & Jackson, S. (1981). The Measurement of Experienced Burnout. Journal
of Occupational Behavior, 2, 99-113.
Maslach, C. & Leiter, M. P. (1997). The Truth about Burnout. How Organizations
Cause Personal Stress and What to Do about It. California, San Francisco: Jossey-
Bass publishers.
Maslach, C., Schaefeli, W. B., & Leiter, M. (2001). Job Burnout. Annual Review of
Psychology, 52(1), 397-422.
Rosse, G. J., Boss, W. R., Johnson, E. A. and Crown, F. D, (1991). Conceptualizing the
Role of Self-Esteem in the Burnout Process. Group Organization Management, Vol.
16, No: 4, 428-451.
Soderfelt, M. & Soderfelt, B. (1995). Burnout in Social Work. Social Work, 40, 638-
647.
Villa, A. and Calvete, E. (2001). Development of the Teacher Self-concept Evaluation
Scale and Its Relation to Burnout.’ Studies in Educational Evaluation. 27, 239-255.

58
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”
November 15-17, 2012 SAMSUN

READER RESPONSE THEORY AND ITS REFLECTIONS IN A READING

CLASS*

Emrah EKMEKÇİ**, Ömer ŞEKERCİ***

ABSTRACT

Reader Response Theory is a literary theory which focuses on the role of the readers as active
participants in reading and literature classes. The theory is a reaction to New Criticism which emphasizes that
the text reveals its own meaning without considering any other extrinsic factors such as historical, social,
context, authorial intention and readers. Contrary to New Criticism, Reader Response Theory describes what
happens in the reader’s mind while interpreting a text. It describes reading as a creative process like writing
and reading is considered as a transaction between the reader and the text. Different readers react to the same
text in different ways, depending upon their interests and experiences. The theory has been adapted to
classrooms by several researches but there has not been a step- by- step application of the theory so far.
The present study, therefore, suggests an additional initial stage for the proposed classroom
applications by collecting and analysing the written responses of the junior and senior students to Henrik
Ibsen‘s play A Doll’s House through the assumptions of the Reader Response Theory. Data are gathered from
32 junior and senior students studying at Süleyman Demirel University, Department of English Language
and Literature through a questionnaire consisting of 30 open-ended questions. Data are qualitatively
analyzed. The results of the study indicate that it is possible to receive as many responses as the number of
the students in reading classes, confirming the claims of the Reader Response Theory. The findings reveal
that no one true interpretation of a text exists despite the fact that the text is the same for all students in terms
of the lexis and the structure. The students’ different approaches to text are linked to the personal factors such
as social background, gender, age, past experiences, current circumstances, regional origins and previous
reading experiences. The study suggests collecting the written responses of students as an initial stage for the
application of the Reader-Response Theory in reading and literature classes. Teachers can organize a reading
lesson by following the suggested initial stage in this study and they can let the students respond to the text
within the framework of their cultural and social background. Since what the students understand from a
book or a play may be different from the author’s intention and teacher’s interpretation, teachers should
permit the students to respond freely without limiting and imposing their own views.

Keywords: Reader Response Theory, New Criticism, Written Responses, Transaction.

*
This study has been partly produced from a master thesis prepared in Süleyman Demirel University at the Department
of English Language and Literature in 2010.
**
Inst. Emrah EKMEKÇİ, Ondokuz Mayis University, School of Foreign Languages, [email protected]
***
Assist. Prof. Dr. Ömer ŞEKERCİ, Suleyman Demirel University, Department of English Language and Literature,
[email protected]

59
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

1. INTRODUCTION
The Reader Response Theory describes what happens in readers’ mind while interpreting a
literary text. It assumes that no text provides self-contained meaning, and literary texts do not have
meaning independently from readers’ interpretations. Rosenblatt (1978), one of the most important
proponents of the theory, and several other scholars (Britton, 1984; Harste, 1985; Dillon, 1978)
state that the act of reading is a transaction between the reader and the text. Neither the reader nor
the text is the mere source of meaning and the reader is no longer the receiver of the meaning but
rather the maker of the meaning. As the focus of the theory is mainly on the reader, the theory has
been adapted to reading and literature classrooms by several researchers and a number of different
classroom activities have been suggested so far. For example, Elliot (1990) offers to use drama,
role-play and letter-writing in conjunction with the text, Carlisse (1999) proposes to prepare
reading logs for student activities in the classroom, and Oster (1989) suggests the task of rewriting
short narratives from another character’s point of view. Hirvela (1996) proposes a change in the
style of questioning a teacher uses, for example, asking ‘How did you feel while reading?’ rather
than ‘What does the author mean?’ However, the question of how best to apply the theory in
practice is still unanswered. Most of the above-mentioned researchers follow the assumptions of
the theory but they do not offer any step- by- step procedures in the classroom.
The primary focus of this paper is, therefore, to suggest an additional initial stage for the
proposed applications of the reader-response theory in the classroom. As an additional initial stage,
students’ written responses will be collected as they may not feel secure in sharing their responses
orally due to the lack of linguistic competence. This study also attempts to indicate the variety and
diversity of students’ responses, the existence of more than one true interpretation of a literary text,
the extrinsic factors affecting the students’ point of view and finally some classroom implications
and suggestions for literature and reading teachers.

1.1. Overview of the Reader-Response Theory

The Reader-Response Theory is a reaction to the New Criticism which emphasizes that the
text itself is enough to get meaning. According to the New Critics, the text reveals its own meaning
and it can be analyzed and dissected so it becomes autonomous. Proponents of the New Criticism,
Ransom (1937), Wellek (1978) and Cleanth (1979) point out that the text itself contains whatever
the readers need to discover. While examining a literary text, the reader searches for both
denotative and connotative meanings, possible allusions within the text, individual words, phrases,
sentences, figures of speech, symbols, point of view and tone. The reader tries to uncover the
meaning of any literary texts without considering the author’s life, times and any other extraneous
information. (Bressler, 1999). Some extrinsic factors such as historical, social, contextual, authorial
intention, authorial biography, readers’ psychology and the response upon reading matter little.
On the other hand, the Reader-Response Theory tries to describe what happens in the
reader’s mind while interpreting a text. It assumes that reading is a creative process like writing. No
text provides self-contained meaning, and literary texts do not have meaning independent from the
readers’ interpretations. Meaning is context - dependent and intricately associated with the reading
process. (Bressler, 1999). The Reader Response Theory pays attention to the areas of psychology,
history, and sociology. In so doing, it turns into an interdisciplinary activity. It develops open-
ended problem solving strategies. Bleich (1981) states that readers are affected by the texts in
unique and subjective ways and they play an important role in determining the meaning of literary
works. Anything that contributes to the development of a reader influences his/her interpretation of
a reading selection. An individual's social class, racial background, ethnicity, gender, nationality,
age, physical condition, employment, vocational interests, and so on, make a profound impact on
how that person sees and understands the world. The impact of these individual differences among
the readers is confirmed by Prince (1981) who is one of the exponents of the Reader Response

60
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Theory. Prince (1981) states that not only the narrator, which means the author, but also narratee,
which means the reader, is attached importance in the reading process as well.
There are two groups of view which ascribe varying degrees of importance to reader and
text in the creation of meaning. Rosenblatt (1978), Iser (1974) and Holland (1968) give equal
importance to the reader and the text in interpretation process while Bleich (1978) and Fish (1980)
put the primary focus on the reader. For example, Norman Holland (1968) and Wolfgang Iser
(1974) suggest that the meaning of a literary text is created within the relationship between the text
and the reader. They believe that the text contains its own themes, unity and structure so it is very
important. However, a reader transforms the text into a private world. Therefore, the reader and the
text interact with each other to get the meaning. However, David Bleich (1978) states that there is
no objective existence of a text. One cannot find meaning in the text but it is developed only if the
reader interacts with the other readers to get the text’s meaning. The meaning can be obtained if the
reader negotiates and discusses on the text within the group. Stanley Fish (1980) supports Bleich in
that it is the interpretative community that creates its own reality. Fish’s theory is sometimes called
reception aesthetics which means that a text is not simply passively accepted by the audience but
the reader or viewer interprets the meanings of the text based on their individual cultural
background and life experiences.
The most important contribution to Reader-Response is made by Louise Rosenblatt (1978)
with her term “transaction”. She asserts that a literary work exists in the transaction between the
reader and the text and she considers reading as an interaction between the reader and the text. She
states that there are no generic readers or generic interpretations but there are countless
relationships between readers and texts. What the student brings to a literary work is very
significant for “the equation represented by book plus reader.”(p.75). Some questions must be
taken into consideration during the reading process such as: why one student’s reaction is different
from another student, why one student chooses one particular slant rather than another, why certain
phases of the book or poem strike some students more forcibly than others, why a student
misinterprets or ignores certain elements, what state of the mind leads students to a distorted or
partial view of the work, what in students’ temperaments and past experiences help them
understand it more adequately, and what questions and obscurities remain. (Rosenblatt, 1978)
Furthermore she states that student’s particular community background, whether they come from
the North or the South, from city or country, from a middle-class or underprivileged home, will
affect the nature of the understanding and the prejudices that they bring to the literary work.
According to Rosenblatt, students must be free while responding to texts even though their
responses do not resemble the ‘standard critical comments’ (p.42). They should be able to express
themselves freely and they should know in advance that their responses are also worth expressing.
Rosenblatt states that literature or reading classes where students feel that everything they think or
say are equally valuable might possibly have a therapeutic effect. Teachers must be aware of the
fact that the students who have a rural or urban background or regional loyalty will tend to build up
stock responses. The fixed ideas and emotional associations that cluster about family and sex
relations may lead to irrelevant responses. Readers must be helped to develop ‘flexibility of mind’
(p.44). At this point, Rosenblatt’s suggestions seem to be practical for reading and literature
classrooms. Her approach insists on the reader’s role in conjunction with the text, the reader’s
individuality affecting and being affected by the text. Therefore, her transactional theory is
pedagogically the most meaningful for teachers.

1.2. Some Practical Classroom Applications of Reader-Response Theory

As a pedagogical tool, the Reader- Response Theory has had a significant impact on both
teaching of reading and literature. Probst (1994) suggests including the assumptions of the theory
in reading and writing curriculum to have independent and self-reliant readers and thinkers.
Supporting Probst’s suggestions, Mishra (2010), upon applying the theory in a reading class,

61
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

summarizes its strong points as it provides interpretative freedom and makes students active
learners, individualizes learning, triggers creative and critical abilities and encourages critical and
creative reading habits among students. In the same way, Hirvela (1996) mentions the fruitfulness
of the theory by making a comparative research between the personal-response approach and
reader-response approach. She finds out that types of questions addressed to the students change in
reader-response, which affects the students’ point of view. She states that personal-response
approach causes students to give artificial responses but with the advent of reader-response, they
begin to give genuine responses as well as personal responses. Another researcher Mitchel (1993)
stresses the importance of learner autonomy by stating that students usually feel very positive
because the talk and the product is theirs. Students are no longer using their energy to guess what
the teacher wants them to think; instead, they are spending energy on creating something that they
have a stake in. This application is for high school literature class and it is based on the oral and
written responses of the students who have read two novels. It is clear that Hirvela and Mitchel’s
research and the applications of the theory are primarily based on the act of reading process and the
interaction between the reader and the text. There exist many other sides for beneficial uses of the
theory in the classroom. For example, Carlisse (1999) looks from another perspective while
applying the assumptions of the Reader-Response Theory. He thinks that Rosenblatt’s
differentiation between efferent reading, which is reading for information, and aesthetic reading,
which is reading for the sake of literature, need to be explained. He points out that students should
be oriented to aesthetic reading as well as efferent reading.
Apart from the above-mentioned research, Reader-Response consists of many other
pedagogical benefits waiting for researchers to be discovered. This study, therefore, aims to find
out the answers of the following questions;
1. Is it possible to receive as many responses as the number of the students?
2. Are there diversities and varieties of responses in the class?
3. Are there any extrinsic factors affecting student’s point of view?
4. Can students’ written responses to a text be used as an initial stage for the
application of Reader- Response Theory in the classroom?
5. Do the initial written responses to a text contribute to classroom discussion?

2.METHODOLOGY
This study is a qualitative case study. This approach is preferred to a quantitative one for
not limiting the students’ responses to a narrow framework since confining students’ responses to
standardized tests is contradictory to the principles of the Reader- Response Theory, which
employs open-ended questions. Analyzing the responses of the students through the principles of
the theory has been debated for a long time. There are contradictory views on response categories,
levels, and processes. For example, Purves and Rippere (1968) and Purves and Beach (1972)
support the use of response category systems such as describing, evaluating certain aspects,
engaging personally, analyzing, and so on. However, Applebee (1977) questions whether such
systems are valid and reliable in that they may fail to capture the readers’ underlying intentions.
Analyzing specific statements is also criticized for being inconsistent with readers’ overall response
orientation (Cooper and Michalak, 1981). Beach and Wendler (1987) use a clustering technique
and focus on categories of reader’s inferences with the questions about a specific character’s acts,
beliefs, and goals. Apart from the category and clustering techniques, some researchers have used
systems judging global response qualities, types, and levels of response according to some criteria,
but these systems are criticized for specifying the ideal response. Most researchers avoid defining
good reading in terms of specific types of response.

62
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Response category system has been revised and recent studies have defined the processes
in which readers are engaged during reading. These processes include engaging, conceiving,
connecting, problem solving, explaining, interpreting and judging and so on. They are highly
influenced by factors in the reader, the text and instructional content. For this reason, more recent
researchers on response methodology have been in favour of using response category system based
on content analysis since it reflects the genuine interaction between the text and the reader.
Therefore, in this study, we employed the response category system on the basis of social, feminist,
experiential, psychological, and phenomenological content of the students’ responses. We
determined the content types according to the responses we obtained from the students and general
principles of the Reader-Response Theory.

2.1. Participants
The research participants were 20 female and 12 male junior and senior students studying
at Süleyman Demirel University, Department of English Language and Literature in 2009-2010
academic year. Students were following Modern English Drama I course in the fall term when the
study was conducted. They were instructed to have read the play A Doll’s House by Henrik Ibsen
before the study was applied. Their language proficiency level was upper-intermediate and
advanced. Turkish was the mother tongue of all students participating in the study. Some of them
attended language preparatory classes before the university but most of them did not follow a
preparatory class before studying at the department. In Turkey, departments of English Language
Teaching and English Language and Literature are generally preferred by female students. It might
be the reason of why the number of females was more than males in our study.

2.2. A Doll’s House

A Doll’s House is a social realist play published in 1879. It has been noted as a major event
in the development of dramatic literature. The play is sharply critical of 19th century marriage
norms. The main character, Nora’s departure at the end of the play makes an impact throughout
society at that time. The play also manifests Ibsen’s concern for women’s rights and for human
rights in general. We have chosen this play for getting students’ responses since the play presents
its theme of individual worth through the skilful manipulation of the characters’ words and actions.
The topical and timely ideas on love, marriage and individual worth are remarkable when we
consider that it was first performed in 1880. The concepts Ibsen presents in this play stimulate
interesting and useful discussions for adolescents who are themselves trying to answer questions
similar to those encountered by the play’s characters: What is love? What demands can be placed
on a loved one? Is there a difference in society’s standards for males and females? How does one
find his true inner worth? What is maturity? The play also presents students with no serious
problem of literal comprehension. In other words, there are no unfamiliar terms and no confusing
political intrigues.

2.3. Data Collection and Analysis

The data were gathered through a questionnaire consisting of 30 randomly selected general
open-ended questions developed by the proponents of the Reader-Response Theory. The questions
were consistent with the principles of the theory but some of them were modified by the researcher
to relate them with the play to which the students’ responded. In the application process of the
questionnaire, we let the students use their mother tongue in order to make them feel more
comfortable while expressing themselves. However, only twelve out of thirty-two students
preferred using English while twenty of them answered the questions in Turkish.

63
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

3. FINDINGS AND DISCUSSION

3.1. Social Content
Students’ social roles and the society in which they live are somehow reflected in the
students’ responses. 26 students out of 32 thought that the most important event in the play was
Nora’s (main character in the play) leaving her children and home. Most of the students did not
approve of her behavior because of the values and morals of the society they live in. This indicates
the effects of social norms on students. 3 students regarded Torwald’s (Nora’s husband) reaction to
Nora’s act when he learned the truth as the most important event while the other 3 thought Nora’s
forgery was the most important one. Regarding the question on which character the students would
like to be in the play, 13 female students thought that they would like to be Nora as she ran for her
freedom. The others would like to be Kristine (a friend of Nora), babysitter or one of the children in
the play. 8 of the students thought that they did not want to be any of the characters. This result
indicates that students’ preferences are influenced by the social roles the characters have in society.
They prefer the one who is socially powerful by comparing them with the ones in their lives.
According to 11 students, the play made them reconsider or think twice about the marriage because
of Nora’s position in society. With regard to this question, there is a variety of responses such as
the women and their roles, men, life, family relations, and freedom. This diversity of responses
shows that each student as a social individual interprets the events or phenomena according to the
degree of importance they attach to in their lives.
It can be inferred from the responses that conservative family structure and some values
and beliefs considered as sacred in Turkish culture had a remarkable effect on students. Turkish
culture is less forgiving about women’s leaving their home and children for the sake of freedom or
whatever it is. For this reason, Nora’s leaving her home and children was not regarded as a simple
issue by the students since Turkish culture is very sensitive about family, women, and children. The
effects of morals, values and societal attitudes are reflected in responses in different ways. Some
students especially female ones supported Nora while male students were in favour of her husband.
This also indicates the relationship between the responses and gender.

3.2. Experiential Content

Students’ past experiences and present preoccupations are reflected in their responses. 13
out of 32 stated that there was a connection between the play and their lives. They thought that they
were treated like Nora at home, so they could understand Nora’s situation very well. One of the
students whose mother and father passed away said “No motherhood anymore in children’s lives.
A life without mum is unbearable” This indicates that students’ past and present experiences lead
them to respond to the play from different perspectives. Rest of the students thought that there was
an indirect connection between the play and their lives. They stated that they were just familiar
with these kinds of people around them. 11 students stated that the play reminded them of their
relatives while 2 students pointed out that Nora resembled them in terms of her courage and self-
confidence. It is clear from this result that most of the students find some common points between
the characters in the play and the people they know in their lives. With regard to the question about
in which part of the play the students feel worried, furious, and surprised, there is a vast variety of
responses. There are responses as many as the number of the students; however there are some
common responses as well. 18 thought that they felt like crying when Nora left her home, husband
and children. 11 thought that they felt furious when Torwald humiliated Nora constantly
throughout the play. Some examples of other individual responses were Nora’s telling a lie, her
attempts to affect Dr. Rank (Nora’s husband’s friend), Torwald’s deception, and so on. The vast
variety and diversity of the responses indicate how students relate their real life experiences to the
characters and events in the play. They approach the play with these sets of experiences and read
the play in this way.

64
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

3.3. Feminist Content

Male and female students interact with the play differently, which indicates the existence of
gender-related responses. 18 out of 32 students supported and appreciated Nora’s behavior and
courage. It was striking that these students were all female. This result suggests that gender plays
an important role in approaching the literary texts. The responses of the rest of 14 students
supported Nora, too but they stated that they were against her leaving the children. 24 students
thought that Nora was not silly but her behaviors were normal for a person who was in love. They
stated that Nora was a symbol of great personal sacrifice. 15 students thought that Torwald did not
seem to love Nora at all and he regarded Nora as a doll. Most of the female students pointed out
that the situation in real life is the same with Nora’s.

3.4. Psychological Content

Students’ emotional experiences are generally reflected in their responses. 15 students
stated that they felt sorry for Nora while 7 students felt confused about their feelings. 4 students got
surprised and 5 students cheered on behalf of Nora. 4 students thought that they felt extremely
sorry when Nora was aware of the facts that she was not taken seriously. 2 students pointed out that
they were about to cry when they were reading the parts in which Torwald treated Nora badly.
However, 3 students stated that they laughed a lot when Torwald treated Nora badly. These two
controversial results signify different psychological moods the students have while responding to
the play. This confirms that each student reads the text with different psychological moods and this
affects their point of views and interpretations of the text.

3.5. Phenomenological Content

There are some gaps for readers to be filled in the literary works. Authors give opportunity
to the readers to enter into the work. The students responding to the play commented on the
purpose of the writer. 24 students thought that the writer’s purpose was to emphasize feminist point
of view. 3 students pointed out that the writer wanted the readers to see how couples behaved each
other. One of the students stated that the writer wanted to make the end of the play more attractive
by using Nora. The other one stated that people determine their own destinies. 15 students pointed
out that the writer wanted the reader to realize women’s place in society. 5 students thought that the
author was the supporter of the weak. Another student pointed out that the author helped readers
see how complicated the marriages were. This result indicates that almost each reader fills in the
gaps provided by the author in their own way and with their own philosophy of life.

4. CONCLUSION AND SUGGESTIONS

In this paper, our goal was to find out whether it is possible to receive as many responses as
the number of the students, whether there are diversities and varieties of responses in the class,
whether there are any extrinsic factors affecting students’ point of view, whether student’s written
responses to a text can be used as an initial stage for the application of Reader-Response Theory in
the classroom and finally whether the initial written responses to a text contribute to classroom
discussion.
The results suggest, overall, that responding to a particular text is a unique process for each
student. Teachers may receive as many responses as the number of the students which indicates the
existence of diversities and varieties of responses in the classroom. It seems that diversities and
varieties of responses are in relation to students’ gender, age, pschology, experiences, and societal
attitudes, which can be accepted as extrinsic factors affecting the responses of the students. Our

65
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

findings demonstrate that these extrinsic factors have a great impact on students’ responses,
therefore teachers should take them into consideration while evaluating the students’ responses.
In terms of the varieties and diversities of responses, our study is consistent with the
previous ones. For example, Bleich (1981), Prince (1981), Rosenblatt (1978), Hirvela (1996),
Probst (1994) and Mishra (2010) reported similar results. Our study also confirms Bleich (1981)
and Prince’s (1981) attaching importance to individual differences on students’ responses. With
regard to classroom applications of the Reader-Response Theory, our results show that the
students’ written responses can be used as an initial stage for the application of the theory since the
responses obtained from the students constitute a road map for the teachers. Teachers can collect
necessary information for the classroom discussion of the reading material or the literary text in
advance. In so doing, they can pre-plan the following discussion activities according to students’
reactions, caring for their prerequisites, expectations and feelings. Similar to Mishra (2010),
Probst(1994), Hirvela (1996), Mitchel (1993), and Carlisse’s (1999) different techniques on the
application of the principles of Reader-response in the classroom, our study presents another
technique. However, our study is different from the others in that we suggest using written
responses before the classroom discussion activities. This technique can be applicable to reading
and literature classes as a prior activity for above-mentioned techniques proposed by several
researchers.
In summary, social, experiential, psychological, feminist, and phenomenological content of
students’ written responses can be a guiding light for language teachers applying the principles of
Reader-Response Theory in the classrooms. Our study is significant in that it helps teachers
organize a Reader-Response class effectively and students know in advance that whatever they
think or state is attached importance by the teacher in the classroom. They become more involved
in the process and learn to respect their friends’ different views for the same issue.

66
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

REFERENCES
Applebee, A. (1977). The elements of response to a literary work: What we have learned. Research
in the teaching of English, 11, 255-271.

Beach, R. & Wendler, L. (1987). Developmental differences in response to a short story. Research
in the teaching of English, 21, 286-298.

Bleich, D. (1978). Subjective Criticism. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press.

Britton, J. (1984). Viewpoints: The distinction between participant and spectator role language in
research and practice. Research in the teaching of English. , 18, 320-331.

Brooks, Cleanth. "The New Criticism." The Sewanee Review 87: 4 (1979): 592

Carlisse, A. (1999). Reading logs: an application of reader-response theory in ELT, ELTJournal,

54/1:12-9

Charles E. Bressler (1999). Literary Criticism.An Introduction to Theory and Practice, 2nd. Ed.
Prentice Hall, New Jersey.

Cooper, C. & Michalak, D. (1981). A note on determining response styles in research on response
to literature. Research in the teaching of English, 15, 163-169.

Dana Gioia , R.S. Gwynn (2001), The Longman Anthology of Short Fiction, Compact Ed.,
Toronto, New York.

Dillon, G. (1978). Language processing and the reading of literature. Bloomington, IN: Indiana
University Pres

Elliot, R. (1990). Encouraging reader-response to literature in ESL situations. ELT Journal 44/3:
191-8.

Fish, S. (1980). Is There a Text in This Class?Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.

Harste, N. (1985)Portrait of a new paradigm: Reading Comprehension Research. In A. Crismore

(Ed),Landscapes: A state of the art assessment of reading comprehension research, 1974
1984 (pp.12:1-24) Bloomington: Center for Reading and Language Studies, University of
Indiana.

Hirvela, A. (1996). Reader-response Theory and ELT, ELT Journal, 50(2), 127-134.

Holland, N. (1968). The Dynamics of Literary Response. New York: Oxford University Press.

Iser, W. (1974). The Implied Reader. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press.

Mishra, P. (2010) Reader Response and Its Relevance for Communicative Language Teaching in
the Context of EFL Learners, ELTWeekly, 2, 62(18).

Mitchell, Diana (1993) Reader Response Theory: Some Practical Applications for the High School
Literature Classroom, Language Arts Journal of Michigan: Vol. 9: Iss. 1, Article 6.

67
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Oster, J. (1989). Seeing with different eyes: another view of literature in the ESL class. TESOL
Quarterly 23: 85-103.

Probst, R. E. (1994). Reader-Response Theory and the English Curriculum. The English Journal
83/3.

Purves, A. & Beach, R. (1972). Literature and the reader: Research on response to literature,
reading interests, and teaching of literature. Urbana, II. National Council of Teachers of
English.

Purves, A. & Rippere, V. (1968). Elements of writing about a literary work: A study of response to
literature. Urbana, II. National Council of Teachers of English.

Ransom, John Crowe. "Criticism, Inc." The Virginia Quarterly Review, Autumn 1937.

Rosenblatt, Louise M. (1978). The Reader, the Text, the Poem: TheTransactiortal Theory of the
Literary Work. Carbondale and Edwardsville: Southern Illinois University Press

Wellek, René. “The New Criticism: Pro and Contra.” Critical Inquiry, Vol. 4, No. 4. (Summer,
1978), pp. 611-624

Approaches to Reading and Interpretation retrieved from March 17, 2009 from
http://www1.assumption.edu/users/ady/hhgateway/gateway/Approaches.html

Reader Response Theory retrieved from

http://www.llp.armstrong.edu/reese/courses/1102/2008Win1102/readerresponse.pdf

68
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”
November 15-17, 2012 SAMSUN

A CASE STUDY: ATTITUDES OF ESP STUDENTS TOWARDS CALL

Esra ERDOĞAN 1*, Özge KUTLU 2**

ABSTRACT
During the last few decades, language classrooms have been shaped in line with various methodologies. The
roles of the teachers and learners have been affected to a great extent; thus, there has been a shift in various
aspects of the language learning process. Meanwhile, CALL genre has emerged thanks to the contributions of
technology. With the emergence of CALL, many language classrooms’ atmosphere has altered. In the present
study, the effects of CALL to the attitudes of ESP students are going to be dealt with. As the qualitative data
collection tool, a questionnaire designed by Levine & Donitsa-Schmidt (1998) is going to be used. Moreover,
the views of the students are going to provide qualitative data of the study.

Keywords: CALL, attitudes, ESP, technology.

1. INTRODUCTION
The emergence of Computer Assisted Language Learning (CALL) has had a tremendous
effect on language learning throughout the world. Along with the vast usage of English around the
world, various communication tools have been provided for people’s use. The success of call
application does not occur on its own as there are some prerequisites to be met in order to
understand the nature of learning and teaching; for our case, the integration of technology, namely
computers, into language instruction. In this study, the attitudes and self-confidence are the main
parameters to see whether computers have a positive effect on learning a foreign language or not,
and whether computers facilitate the learning process or hinder it. Furthermore, this study is going
to demonstrate statistically to what extent attitudes and confidence are influenced by using
computers as an aid to learn and improve the language skills. The research questions of the current
study are as follows:
1. Is there a change between the attitudes of the ESP students towards technology before and
after the application?
2. What are the views of ESP students towards technology usage in the class?

2. REVIEW OF LITERATURE
2.1. Theoretical Framework
According to Tılfarlıoğlu (2011), the attempt to use systematical technology in language
classrooms started with CALL. As for this attempt, Chiu (2003) states that chronologically CALL
developed through an electronic extension of programmed language learning or programmed
instruction. In that sense, Warschauer and Healey (1998) divides these CALL periods into three
groups. The first period was Behaviourist CALL, which was driven by behaviorisim. The second
period was Communicative CALL, which was deeply affected by cognitivism, focused on using
forms rejecting the behaviourism’s focus on drills and forms themselves. While Integrative CALL,
as the third group, switched from cognitive perspectives into socio-cognitive view. Meanwhile, it
was also getting the benefit of authentic language use in meaningful contexts (Akbulut, 2008).

69
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

2.2. Relevant Studies

When ESP applications of CALL are considered, there are varios studies. Among these,
Luzón (2007) states that ICT provides related, rich and complex learning ways when compared
with traditional media types. In that sense, Vaičiūnienė & Užpalienė (2010) states the advantage of
websites for ESP classes as follows:
With the advantage of the world websites, ESP teachers/students have at their disposal large amount
and variety of material available: texts, visual materials, newspapers, magazines, live radio and TV,
video clips and much more. Throwing ESP students in at the deep end of authenticity makes them
develop their own strategies for dealing with real language and on the other hand prevents students
from being reliant on simplified language (p. 95).
Askari Arani (2004) conducted pre and post tests as for the identification of achievement
levels with traditional texts and articles from the internet. The majority of the students pointed out
that ICT based ESP teaching is more efficient and motivating. Ming & Bidmeshki (2006) also
points out that students find online English learning experience as fun, entertaining and flexible. A
study in a similar vein, Dayd (1994) states that ESP enables “livelier and more enjoyable, and thus,
create a more effective environment for the learner”

3. METHODOLOGY

With the issues on the agenda, the aim of this case study is to investigate the attitudes of
ESP students towards the use of technology in the classroom settings. Focus on attitudes towards
CALL, quantitative differences of attitudes were measured through Computer Attitudes and
Confidence Questionnaire (Levine & Donitsa-Schmidt, 1998).The reliability of this questionnaire
ranges between 0.65 and 0.90. As the study is planned as a preliminary study, the qualitative data
(as students’ views) and quantitative data (as pre-post test results) are going to be gathered in line
with the results. Fraenkel & Wallen (2001) suggests case study as a tool for enabling
generalizations for a particular school, student group. Thus, in the present study, case study is
chosen as a method to pave the way for learning attitudes of the students. Apart from this method,
interviews with students chosen randomly were held before and after the instruction in order to
elicit student responses to have clearer insights into their attitudes towards CALL and language
learning.
3.1. Participants
Participants of the present study are false beginner ESP students in their first year at Hitit
University in Çorum/Turkey. They comprise the population (n=148) of the study. As deduced from
participants’ accounts, most of them had little or no instruction in terms of integrating technology
into language classes prior to this class. Students varied greatly in their computer skills, yet all of
them had been exposed to computer instruction before. Besides, they took part in computer
instruction class in the first term just like the English course.
3.2. Data Collection and Analysis
This study was conducted over a month; Computer Attitudes and Confidence Questionnaire
was applied in the first week, and then two-weeks long video instruction was held during the
English course given by the researcher, already working at university. Videos about health and
nursing care downloaded from various internet sites were shown to the students. Furthermore,
comprehension questions were asked, and related vocabulary was elicited by the instructor. This
instruction went on for two weeks, and then the same questionnaire was given again in order to see
if there were any differences regarding the participants’ attitudes towards computer usage in the
course of language instruction. Before and after video instructions, some students were interviewed
about the relevance and usefulness of the videos. The procedure applied in this case study is
illustrated in Figure 1.

70
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Figure 1: The procedure cycle of the case study

4. FINDINGS AND DISCUSSION

The reliability of this questionnaire was found between 0.65 and 0.90. Frequency analysis
was carried out for this questionnaire, and researchers ended up with 84 different tables in the end.
Since researchers have limited time and space in this article, they determined 4 themes and chose 8
items from the questionnaire in total. With 42 items, CACQ (Levine & Donitsa-Schmidt, 1998)
was used and responses were made on 5-point Likert scale ranging from 1. ‘strongly agree’ to 5.
‘strongly disagree’. These themes could be paraphrased into 4 main questions and 8 items taken
from the questionnaire. The questions and items are listed with tables below:

1. Are computers really necessary?

Table 1: The world would be better off without computers.

1 2 3 4 5
Before 3.6% 1.8% 28.6% 50% 16.1%
After 0% 8.6% 25.7% 40% 25.7%

Table 2: People managed before without computers, so computers are not really necessary
now.
1 2 3 4 5
Before %0 %8.9 %7.1 %62.5 %21.4
After %2.9 %5.7 %11.4 %68.6 %11.4

When the two tables (Table 1-Table 2) are examined, it can be obviously seen that more than
half of the students found computers necessary prior to the video sections. When the survey was
given to the students, they agreed on the computers’ necessity. On the other hand, after the
sessions, there has been a decrease in the first statement, while there has been an increase in the
second statement. This could illustrate the fact that students did not regard these two statements
similar.

71
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

2. Are computers effective and educative tools?

Table 3: The computer is an educational tool.

1 2 3 4 5
Before 17.9% 58.9% 12.5% 7.1% 3.6%
After 17.1% 57.1% 11.4% 11.4% 2.9%

Table 4: The computer is an effective tool.

1 2 3 4 5
Before 25.5% 47.3% 16.4% 9.1% 1.8%
After 14.3% 62.9% 11.4% 11.4% 0%

The second theme is about the effectiveness and educative purpose of the computers. For the
first statement in Table 3, there is a slight decrease among the responses. However, results show
that the students believe that computers could be used in the education. For the second statement in
Table 4, students seem more certain about its effectiveness like in prompts 3, 4, 5. However, there
has been a decrease in prompt 1. This result could demonstrate the fact that the students did not like
them as the teacher expected and they might have linked their opinions to the effectiveness of the
computers.

3. Can you learn from computers?

Table 5: One can learn new things from computers.

1 2 3 4 5
Before 44.6% 51.8% 1.8% 1.8% 0%
After 34.3% 40% 14.3% 5.7% 5.7%

Table 6: You can learn a lot from using a computer

1 2 3 4 5
Before 28.6% 48.2% 12.5% 7.1% 3.6%
After 17.1% 77.1% 2.9% 2.9% 0%

When these two statements are examined in Table 5 and Table 6, one can easily notice that
there is a decline in student responses in terms of learning from the computer factor. Initially,
students considered that one could learn from computers, but surprisingly after video sessions, they
did not share the same view. In other words, videos did not help them to feel confident about the
idea that one could learn via computers. There might be various reasons for this result. Presumably,
they did not find the video sessions fruitful or interesting, or they had technical problems in the
course of the sessions.

72
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

4. Do computers help school subjects?

Table 7: Using the computer in different school subjects makes studying fun.
1 2 3 4 5
Before 25% 44,6% 17,9% 10,7% 1,8%
After 8,6% 22,9% 51,4% 17,1% 0%

Table 8: The computer is like a private tutor.

1 2 3 4 5
Before 3,6% 12,5% 10,7% 55,4% 17.9%
After 8,6% 17,1% 28,6% 37,1% 8,6%

For the first item in Table 7, prior to the video sessions, students assumed that using
computers for different school subjects would make studying fun. However, after the sessions,
there has been a sharp decline in their positive beliefs. Moving from their responses, it could be
assumed that students were not that positive after the sessions. This negative attitude might be
attributed not only to video sessions but also to the other experiences they had via using computers.
Students tended to prefer traditional methods.

As for the second item in Table 8, students highly disagreed with the computers’ private and
personal teaching; however, after the sessions, they changed their mind and saw it as a potential
alternative learning tool. Nevertheless, it should be noted that there has been a non-negligible
percentage of uncertainty among the students. Overall results show that the students have had
positive assumptions about the computers, yet it seems that they have not been quite convinced
about their effectiveness, necessity, and educative functions. This might suggest to the researchers
that though 21st century learners are eager and talented about technology and computers, it is not so
easy to accommodate them in the classes for learning English. As a further remark, it can be said
that computers and their integration into language instruction is a controversial issue. It is obvious
that instructors require a really sound methodology and motivation of the students to accomplish
the integration of ESP to the language classroom.

5. CONCLUSION AND SUGGESTIONS

In conclusion, it can be said that technology use did not affect the students’ learning styles
with computers in the present study. In that sense, technology usage with ESP students needs
further investigation. In the present study, some inconsistencies have been found in the student
responses during the analysis period. Therefore, further investigation like interviews needs to be
conducted to identify the students’ problems. Consequently, instructors need to keep in mind that
ICT opportunities should be used in line with a sound pedagogical criteria and the exact
identification of students’ needs (Luzón, 2007). The studies of the present study might shed light
onto the deeper understanding of the various student needs in the course of CALL applications.

REFERENCES
Akbulut, Y. (2008). Exploration of the attitudes of freshman foreign language students towards
using computers at a Turkish State University. TOJET: The Turkish Online Journal of
Educational Technology, 7, 2.
Askani Arani, J. (2004). The effect of ICT-based teaching method on medical students' ESP
learning. Journal of Medical Education, 4 (2), 81-83.

73
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Chiu, W., M. (2003). Computer-Assisted Language Learning: Attitudes of Taiwanes Students.

Doctoral dissertation: The University of Florida, Florida.
Dayd, N. M. (1994). Integrating CALL into ESP. IATEFL ESP SIG Newsletter, 1.
Fraenkel, J. R. & Wallen, N.E. (2009). How to design and evaluate research in education.
McGraw-Hill.
Levine, T., & Donitsa-Schmidt, S. (1998). Computer use, confidence, attitudes and knowledge: A
causal analysis. Computers in Human Behavior, 14, 125–146.
Luzón, María José (2007) Enhancing Webquest for effective ESP learning. CORELL: Computer
Resources for Language Learning, 1, 1-13.
Ming, T. S. & Bidmeshki, L. (2006). Evaluating Malaysian science and technology undergraduates'
reactions towards an online ESP Course. CALL-EJ Online, 7 (2).
Tılfarlıoğlu, F. (2011). An international dimension of the students’ attitudes towards the use of
English in WEB 2.0 Technology. TOJET: The Turkish Online Journal of Educational
Technology, 10, 1-2.
Vaičiūnienė , V. & Užpalienė, D. (2010). Authentic resources in Technology-based ESP Learning.
Studies About Languages, 17, 94-98.
Warschauer, M., & Healey, D. (1998). Computers and language learning: An overview. Language
Teaching, 31(2), 57–71.

74
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”
November 15-17, 2012 SAMSUN

LEARNING STYLES AND STRATEGIES OF EFFECTIVE AND LESS

EFFECTIVE LEARNERS AND GENDER DIFFERENCES IN STRATEGY
PREFERENCES

Gökhan ÇETİNKAYA*

ABSTRACT

This paper discusses the learning styles and strategies of effective and less effective learners.
Participants of the study are 74 university students studying English at preparatory class at Düzce University.
The students were categorized as effective and less effective learners based on their scores on a Diagnostic
test designed by Maastricht University in 2002. To collect data on students’ language learning strategy
preferences, learning styles and language practice and use, students were administered Willing’s (1994)
questionnaire. The survey revealed that effective learners don’t have a favorable learning style, but less
effective learners’ dominant learning style is concrete. There are significant differences in strategy
preferences between effective and less effective learners; in addition, within the group of effective and less
effective learners, female students in both groups showed differences in strategy preferences to male
students.

Keywords: Learning style, Language learning strategies, Effective learners, Less effective learners,
Gender differences

1. INTRODUCTION
Understanding the individual differences among language learners in our classes is crucial
for effective teaching and learning. As Carrell et al., (1996) states that teachers of L2s need to learn
to identify and understand their students’ significant individual differences (cited in Joycey and
Kantaridou, 2011). Among the differences of our students that they bring into the classroom, their
learning strategies associated with the learning styles play an important role. Razawi et al. (2011)
state the discussion on the students’ diverse learning styles can have a significant impact on the
teaching and learning process in ESL education. In our study, we will replicate the study carried
out by Wong and Nunan (2011) on the learning style and strategy preferences of effective and less
effective learners in Chinese context and compare the results of this study in Turkish context with
theirs. In addition, we will also analyze the relationship between style and strategy preferences of
female and male students. Then, our research questions are;

1) What are the learning styles of effective and less effective students?
2) What are the language learning strategies associated with appropriate learning styles of
effective and less effective students?
3) Are there any differences among the time that effective and less effective learners spend
outside the school for practicing English?
4) Are there any differences in the perception of importance of English between effective
and less effective learners?

_______________________

* Gökhan ÇETİNKAYA, Düzce University, [email protected]

75
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

5) Are there any differences in the enjoyment of studying English between effective and
less effective learners?
6) Are there any differences in the self-ratings of English proficiency level between
effective and less effective learners?
7) Are there any differences in language learning strategies of male and female students in
the group of effective and less effective learners?

2. REVIEW OF LITERATURE

As Entwistle (1981), states learning styles can be defined, classified, and identified in
many different ways (cited in Bailey, Daley and Onwuegbuzie, 1999). However, giving some
definitions of learning styles, Reid (1998) defines learning styles as internally based characteristics,
often not perceived or consciously used by learners, for the intake and comprehension of new
information (p. ix), and according to Dörnyei (2005), they are individual’s approach to learning, a
blueprint of habitual or preferred way the individual perceives, interacts with, and responds to
learning environment (p. 121). Dunn (1989) indicates that it is a set of biological traits that make
teaching ineffective for some ones and effective for others. This affects the quality of learning of
the learners (cited in Farooq and Regnier, 2011).

In relation to language learning styles, Willing (1994) identified four major language
learning styles; communicative, analytical, authority-oriented and concrete (cited in Nunan, 2011),
and he was able to relate it to Kolb’s (1976) cognitive model (cited in Castro and Peck, 2005;
Wong and Nunan, 2011).

Willing’s learning styles for L2 learning:

1. Communicative learners (Accommodators): They are interested in studying language for
language use but are not interested in analytical study. They are holistic learners who are risk
takers and like to learn outside of the classroom, therefore seeking opportunities to engage in
communication with native speakers.
2. Concrete Learners (Divergers): These learners like a classroom with authority and
organization, but also like the social aspect of the classroom. They are people oriented and are
interested in language for communication purposes.
3. Analytical (Assimilators): These are solitary analytical learners who like to learn about the
language rather than use it. They see language learning as a systematic process and rely on others
as experts, therefore seeking authority figures. They look for well-organized teachers who
provide structure. They function well in non-communicative classrooms. They like to follow
instructions and the textbook, preferring a visual style to learning.
4. Authority-Oriented (Convergers): They are active solitary learners who dislike groups. They
see language as an object of study, not something to express affective or personal values. They
would rather learn about the language (meta-linguistic knowledge).

Researchers have studied learning styles in different aspects; such as, its relation to gender,
language learning difficulties, language learning anxiety, culture, teaching styles and language
learning strategies. For example, females and males have different learning style preferences
(Wehrwein, Lujan, & DiCarlo, 2007 as cited in Emamipour and Efsandabad, 2010); furthermore,
Tabanlıoğlu (2003) found out significant differences in the preferences of tactile learning in female
and male students. In addition to these, Emamipour and Efsandabad, (2010) urge that learning
styles are influenced by gender, culture and ethnicity background.

In his longitudinal study, Castro and Peck (2005) found out that regardless of any specific
language learning deficit or difficulty, a student preferred learning styles can hinder or help success
in the foreign language classroom.

76
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Bailey, Delay and Onwuegbuzie (1999) investigated the relationship between learning
styles and language learning anxiety and found out that only responsibility and peer-orientation
among twenty learning styles variables are associated with language learning anxiety.

In their study Gündüz and Özcan (2010) found out that cultures of the students and
demographic variables affect their learning styles. As a result of their study, they conclude that
each student learns in a different way, and to address these learning styles, teachers should use a
variety of teaching styles.

Peacock (2001) reexamined Reid’s (1987) hypothesis suggesting that all students have
their own learning styles and learning strengths and weaknesses, and a mismatch between teaching
and learning styles causes learning failure, frustration, and demotivation. He had the same results
as Reid and concludes that hypothesis 1 and 2 are generally true for students. He further suggests
that as learning styles within a class generally differ, perhaps a better approach is to strive for a
balanced teaching style that does not excessively favor any one learning style – or rather that tries
to accommodate multiple learning styles.

Bialystok (1990) and Oxford (1990, 1996) states that in the language-learning field,
virtually all definitions of strategies imply conscious movement toward a language goal (cited in
Ehrman, et al., 2003), and we can see this approach to learning strategies in the following
definitions. (Reid, 1998) defines learning strategies as external skills often used consciously by the
students to improve their learning (p. ix). Oxford (1999b) urges that learning strategies are specific
actions, behaviors, steps or techniques that students use to improve their own progress in
developing skills in a second or foreign language (cited in Ehrman et al., 2003). From the
definitions above, we can easily see the differences between learning styles and strategies; while
styles are unconscious and fairly fixed, strategies are learnt and conscious behaviors towards
learning. As Cohen, (2003) and Oxford, (2003) state learning styles are general approaches to
language learning, while learning strategies are specific ways to deal with language tasks in
particular contexts (cited in Wong and Numan, 2011) In addition, Bailey, Daley and Onwuegbuzie,
(1999) also separate strategies from styles as followed “Learning styles represent unintentional or
automatic individual characteristics, whereas learning strategies are actions chosen by students that
are intended to facilitate learning.” The importance of language learning strategies for students own
progress and development can not be underestimated as Dörnyei (2005) states they are learners’
proactive contribution to enhancing the effectiveness of their own learning (p. 166). However, the
use of a specific strategy becomes effective when it suits to the learning styles of the student and to
the language learning task. According to Ehrman, et al. (2003), there are three conditions for a
strategy to be effective and useful; they are (a) the strategy relates well to the L2 task at hand, (b)
the strategy fits the particular student’s learning style preferences to one degree or another, (c) the
student employs the strategy effectively and links it with other relevant strategies.

There are different schemes trying to explain different kinds of language learning strategies
used by students; for example, Oxford (1990, 1992 as cited in Ehrman et al., 2003) has developed
Strategy Inventory for Language Learning (SILL) and identified six groups; they are cognitive,
meta-cognitive, memory-related, compensatory, affective and social strategies.

Park (1997) investigated the relationship between the use of language learning strategy and
language proficiency by using SILL and TOEFL scores of students and found out a linear
relationship between learning strategies and language proficiency. The finding of his study also
suggests that cognitive and social strategies used by Korean students are more predictive of
language proficiency than other four strategies.

77
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Rubin (1975) identified seven learning strategies favored by effective learners through
classroom observation and Stern (1975) listed ten learning strategies of good language learners and
described good language learners in the aspects of personal characteristics, style and strategies
(cited in Wong and Nunan, 2011). Abraham and Vann, 1987; Chamot and O’Malley, 1996 urged
that less able learners often use strategies in a random, unconnected, and uncontrolled manner,
while more effective learners show carefully orchestrated, targeted strategies (cited in Ehrman et
al., 2003). However, as Nel (2008) states no one style which typifies good language learner has not
been identified yet (p. 57).

3.METHODOLOGY
3.1. Participants
The participants of the study are seventy -four students from different departments
studying at preparatory classes at Duzce University. Thirty four of them were identified as more
effective, and forty of them as less effective learners based on the results of Diagnostic Test
designed by Maastricht University, and the students had been studying for about six months when
they took the test in April, 2012.

3.2. Instruments
We used two instruments to identify effective and less effective learners and their learning
styles. To identify the proficiency levels of the students, we used ninety-nine-item Diagnostic Test
designed by Maastricht University in 2002.

We used Willing’s (1994) questionnaire adapted from Wong and Nunan’s (2011) study to
collect data about the learning styles of the students. The questionnaire was first translated into
Turkish, and was back translated by two experts in the area. Two questions in the first part which
solicited biographical and attitudinal information about the learners were eliminated since they are
not suitable for our context and don’t serve for our purpose. They are students’ grades and the
faculty and department they belong to. We didn’t include the former question since we already had
the results of test by Maastricht University, and we excluded the latter one because we are not
seeking any correlation between the proficiency level and the department that the students belong.
In addition, we included gender item in Turkish version to analyze the correlation between gender
and strategy preferences. In the first part, at the end, we had the following questions;

Year of study
Gender
Number of hour per week that English is practiced/used off campus
Percentage of lectures/tutorials/workshops conducted in English
Rating of importance of English
Self-rating of language proficiency on a five-point scale
Extent to which the student enjoys English

After we piloted the Turkish version of the questionnaire to 176 students who studied
English at preparatory class in the previous year; 2009-10 academic years, on SPSS, we used
Cronbach Alpha to calculate the reliability of the questionnaire, and it was 0, 905; however, we had
to exclude the item 21 (I like to learn English with the whole class) since it was found out that the
reliability of this item is much lower than the overall questionnaire. Following the reliability test,
we carried out factor analysis on twenty-nine questions, and we had eight factors, three of them
were unrelated and to decrease the number of factors, we had to eliminate four unrelated items in
the questionnaire; as a result, the second part of the questionnaire consisted of five factors with
twenty-five items. We eliminated items 7 (I like to listen and use cassettes in the class), 9 (In class,

78
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

I like to learn by conversation), 18 (In class I like to learn by myself “alone”) and 35 (I like to learn
English outside class in stores etc.) in the original questionnaire.

3.3. Data Collection and Analysis

First, we administered the Diagnostic Test designed by Maastricht University to 320

students at preparatory class at Düzce University in academic year 2011-12. Based on the results of
the test, we categorized the students whose proficiency levels are upper-intermediate as effective
and whose proficiency levels are beginner as less effective learners. As a result, we had 40
effective and 58 less effective learners. The rest of the learners’ proficiency levels change from
elementary to intermediate levels. Then, we administered the learning styles questionnaire by
Willing (1994) to 411 students; however, on the day of the administration, some effective and less
effective learners were absent, so we had 34 effective and 40 less effective learners completing the
questionnaire.

Data obtained through learning style questionnaire was analyzed by using SPSS 16. Chi-
square was used to analyze the correlation between effective and less effective learners’ learning
styles and differences in the strategy preferences of male and female students.

4. FINDINGS AND DISCUSSION

4.1 Differences between male and female students’ proficiency levels and learning
strategies

Chi-square results yielded that there is not a statistically significant relationship between
the gender and the proficiency levels of the students; Df: 1, Sig: 0,131. (See table 1 below for
details.) 52 % of males and only 33 % of females are effective learners. On the other hand, within
the group of effective learners, male and female students showed a difference on item 22 “I like to
learn English words by seeing them”; Df: 3, Sig: 0,045. (See table 2 below for details.) 54 % of
male students assigned as effective often use this strategy, but only 13 % of female students prefer
it. In the group of less effective learners, though, male and female students showed difference on
three items;
Item 10: I like to have my own textbook.
Item 15: I like the teacher to let me find my own mistakes.
Item 19: I like to study grammar.

Table 1: The Ratio Of Male And Female Students In The Group Of Effective And Less
Effective Learners

Gender
Male Female
Effective Count 26 8
% within effective 76,5% 23,5%
% within gender 52,0% 33,3%
Less effective Count 24 16
% within effective 60,0% 40,0%
% within gender 48,0% 66,7%

79
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Table 2: Gender Difference On Item 22 Within Effective Learners

Gender
Male Female
No 1 0
A little 3 0
Effective
Good 8 7
Best 14 1
No 2 1
A little 7 2
less effective
Good 10 8
Best 5 5

While 75 % of female students chose options good and best for item 10, only 40 % of male
students chose these options for the same item; Df: 3, Sig: 0,001. (See table 3 below for details.)
For item 15, 75 % female students chose good and best, but 66 % of male students selected these
options; Df: 3, Sig: 0,023. (See table 4 below for details.) Also, 72 % of female students chose
options good and best for item 19, but for male students for the same item, the percentage is 33;
Df:3 , Sig: 0,030. (See table 5 below for details.)

Table 3: Gender Differences On Item 10 Within The Group Of Less Effective Learners

Gender

Male Female

No 1 0

A little 3 0
Effective
Good 8 7

Best 14 1

No 2 1

A little 7 2
less effective
Good 10 8

Best 5 5

80
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Table 4: Gender Differences On Item 15 Within The Group Of Less Effective Learners

Gender
Male Female
No 1 0
A little 7 1
Effective
Good 10 4
Best 8 3
No 4 4
A little 9 0
Less effective
Good 7 2
Best 2 10

Table 5: Gender Differences On Item 19 Within The Group Of Less Effective Learners

Gender
Male Female
No 1 0
A little 10 5
Effective
Good 11 1
Best 4 2
No 6 2
A little 10 4
Less effective
Good 2 8
Best 6 2

4.2. Differences in the amount of time spent outside school for practicing English

According to test results, there is a statistical relationship between the proficiency level of
students and the amount of time they spend outside school for practicing English; Df: 3, Sig: 0,006.
(See table 6 below for details.) While 75 % of less effective learners spend less than one hour
outside school, there is only one student who spends more than ten hours and there is no student
who spends between 5-10 hours outside school for practicing English. On the other hand, majority
of effective learners (41 %) spend between 1-5 hours outside school and the percentage of less
effective learners spending between 1-5 hours is 22, 5 %. 20,6 % of effective learners spend 5-10
hours or more than ten hours outside school. As a result, we can say that more effective learners
spend more time outside school for practicing English than less effective learners. However, this
study can’t give the direction of this relationship; effective learners are good at English because
they study more outside school, or they study more outside school and as a result they are better at
learning English.

81
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Table 6: Hours Spent Per Week On Using English Off Campus

1
Less than 1 hour 1-5 5-10 More than 10 hours
Effective 13 14 4 3
Less effective 30 9 0 1

4.3 Differences in the perception of importance of English

Chi-square results show that the number of effective learners who perceive English as
important is higher than the number of less effective learners; Df: 4, Sig: 0,043. (See table 7 below
for details.) Learning English is considered as important and extremely important by 94 % of
effective learners but only by 72 % of less effective learners. In addition, none of the effective
learners think that learning English is not important, 10 % of less effective learners consider
learning English as unimportant, though.

Table 7: Perception Of Importance Of Learning English

Not at all Not very Somewhat Very Extremely

Effective 0 0 2 11 21
Less effective 2 2 7 16 12

4.4 Differences in self-rating of language ability

As expected effective learners rate their English proficiency higher than less effective
learners; Df: 4, Sig: 0,001. However, while only one effective learner selected the highest
proficiency level, three less effective learners selected this item. On the other hand, overall self
ratings of effective learners are higher as mentioned above.

4.5 Difference in enjoyment of learning English

According to Chi-square results, there is a statistically significant relationship between the

proficiency level and the enjoyment of learning English; Df: 4, Sig: 0,001. (See table 8 below for
details.) The effective learners have more joy while studying English than less effective learners
do. 62 % of effective learners indicated that they had fun while studying English and only one
indicated that he didn’t have fun. On the other hand, 30 % of less effective learners indicated that
they didn’t have fun and only 25 % have fun while studying English.

Table 8: Enjoyment of Learning English

Not at all Not very Somewhat A lot A great deal

Effective 0 1 12 15 6
Less effective 4 8 18 8 2

82
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

4.6 Differences in overall learning strategies preferred by effective and less effective
learners

A chi-square analysis revealed significant differences between more and less effective
students on seven items on the questionnaire. They were as follows:
Item 6 In English class, I like to learn by reading.
Item 15 I like the teacher to let me find my mistakes.
Item 20 I like to learn many new words.
Item 21 I like to practice sounds and pronunciation.
Item 23 I like to learn English words by hearing them.
Item 25 At home, I like to learn by reading newspapers, etc.
Item 30 I like to learn by watching, listening to native speakers.

Except for the item 15, scores were significantly higher for more effective learners, and
only for item 15, scores were higher for less effective learners.

In addition, the five most popular strategies of effective learners are

In class, I like to learn by pictures, films, video.
I like the teacher to tell me all my mistakes.
I like to learn many new words.
I like to learn English words by hearing them.
I like to learn by watching, listening to native speakers.

The five most popular strategies of less effective learners are

In class, I like to learn by games.
In class, I like to learn by pictures, films, video.
I like the teacher to help me talk about by interests.
I like to learn English words by seeing them.
I like to learn by watching, listening to native speakers.

Although two strategies “In class, I like to learn by pictures, films, video and I like to learn
by watching, listening to native speakers.” are favored by both groups, the percentages of using
these two items are higher for more effective learners, as in other strategies. The percentages of
effective learners for strategies they prefer are higher than the less effective learners’.

4.7 Learning styles of effective and less effective learners.

Ehrman et al., (2003) state that styles are made manifest by learning strategies (overt
learning behaviors/actions). In accordance with the statement, we identified learning styles of
students based on their strategy preferences. Chi-square results yielded that the effective learners
don’t have a dominant learning style. 38 % of effective students are concrete, 29 % are authority-
oriented and 23 % are communicative learners. In addition, 3 students weren’t assigned any styles
since their scores are equal for two styles. On the other hand, less effective learners’ dominant style
is concrete. 63 % of less effective students are concrete, 18 % are authority-oriented and 8 % are
communicative learners. 5 students weren’t assigned any style since they have equal scores for two
learning styles. Furthermore, none of the students were assigned to analytical learning style since
two of the groups created via factor analysis on SPSS don’t fit into analytical style described by
Willing. The number of the students in each style group is shown in the table 9.

83
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Table 9: Overall Learning Styles

Concrete Authority-oriented Communicative

Effective 13 10 8
Less effective 25 7 3

The Turkish version of the questionnaire has five factors although the original one by
Willing has four. Each of three groups out of five was given a language learning style described by
Willing (1994). They are concrete, authority-oriented and communicative. However, one item in
concrete and one item in authority-oriented learning style don’t fit into these learning styles, and
while evaluating the language learning styles of students, they weren’t included. The extra item in
concrete style “I like the teacher to give us problems to work on” originally belongs to analytical,
and the extra one in authority-oriented style “I like to learn by watching, listening to native
speakers” belongs to communicative learning style. Two groups which weren’t given a learning
style, on the other hand include strategies belonging to different learning style labels described by
Willing. You can see these two groups below and in parenthesis which learning style the strategies
originally belong to.
Group I
6. In English class, I like to learn by reading. (authority-oriented)
20. I like to learn many new words. (communicative)
21. I like to practice sounds and pronunciation. (analytical)
22. I like to learn English words by seeing them. (concrete)
23. I like to learn English words by hearing them. (communicative)
Group II
11. I like the teacher to explain everything to us. (authority-oriented)
13. I like the teacher to help me talk about by interests. (authority-oriented)
14. I like the teacher to tell me all my mistakes. (authority-oriented)
15. I like the teacher to let me find my mistakes. (analytical)

These two false grouping may have occurred as a result of mis-wording of statements in
Turkish version of the questionnaire, or students may have considered the second group as a whole
as they are all related to teacher. For group 1, we can also say that the students believe that reading
and memorizing vocabulary items are the key elements for high proficiency level and for speaking
the target language, they need to learn how to pronounce the words clearly since there are different
sounds in English from Turkish; these beliefs might have shaped group II.

While the dominant learning style of less effective learners is concrete, we couldn’t
identify a learning style for effective learners since the scores of students for each style is equally
distributed. That is the main difference between the current study and Wong’s and Nunan’s (2011)
study. In their study communicative learning style was assigned as the dominant style of effective
learners, but current study revealed that effective learners don’t have a specific style rather their
preferences vary. In addition, less effective learners’ dominant style is different from the Wong’s
and Nunan’s study. In their study the dominant learning style of less effective learners was
authority-oriented; however, according to the results of current study, it is concrete.

For both groups, concrete learning style is the most favorable one; this might be the result
of extensive use of GTM in primary and high schools although it is severely criticized and there are
many attempts to move to more communicative methods at schools. Even though students have
usually been exposed to explicit teaching of grammar rules, and study the language as they study
other school subjects like physics or math, they are also aware of communication aspects of a

84
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

language and have a desire to speak the target language. To realize this goal, teachers use videos,
flashcards, and students are involved in activities such as information gap. While all these activities
are communicative, teachers usually insist on grammar, and students don’t think that they have
progressed when they don’t cover a grammar point in a class. One of the distinctive features of
GTM is its teacher-centeredness, and the second most favorable style of effective and less effective
students is authority-oriented. Students expect the teacher to be unique source of information about
the language, and to organize and direct all the activities in the class. The students at any level like
having a textbook to have the sense of progress, taking notes and studying grammar. While
teachers try to be more communicative and humanistic, they use GTM in the classroom
extensively; this dilemma can affect and shape students’ strategy and style preferences.

Data revealed that over 50 % of less effective learners are concrete in their overall learning
style, and for effective learners it is the most favorable one although their learning styles vary. In
addition, we should also mention that all styles were represented to varying degrees in all learners
regardless of their proficiency level. Nel (2008) explains that although style preferences are often
presented in dichotomies, many learners, of course, exclusively display one style or its bipolar
opposite, but operate somewhere on an intervening continuum (p. 50). For this reason, as
Christison (2003) states pedagogy should be style-neutral, and that the focus should be on
encouraging learners to ‘stretch their styles’ (cited in Wong and Nunan, 2011).

The most significant differences between effective and less effective learners were
attitudinal on the survey. Clearly, effective learners spend more time studying English outside the
school, have more fun learning English and consider learning a foreign language as more important
than the less effective learners. These attitudinal differences might be the main source of
differences in their proficiency levels, these results are also consistent with Wong’s and Nunan’s
(2011) study.

5. CONCLUSION AND SUGGESTIONS

The study revealed that effective learners don’t have a dominant learning style, but over 50
% of less effective learners are concrete. However, as we mentioned before, all learning styles are
represented in both groups and even in all learners. In addition, in the group of less effective
learners, there are statistically significant differences in three strategy preferences between male
and female students, and in the group of effective learners, there is only one strategy that is more
favorable for female students. In addition, we also found out that students’ attitudes towards
English differ significantly between two groups.

For the implication of these results, teachers who are aware of students’ individual
differences in their classes and want to meet their needs should focus on students’ diverse learning
styles and always try to organize classroom activities appealing to all learners’ learning styles and
strategies. In this respect, Felder & Henriques (1995) state that teachers should arrange learning
activities by considering not only one learning style but also different learning styles (cited in Altun
and Yazıcı, 2010), and such an approach leads the teacher to be style-neutral. Farooq and Regnier
(2011) summarize the point as followed;

Without considering the learning styles of learners, it is not possible to provide them healthy
learning experiences. If the main objective of education is to develop mastery among the learners
about the information being provided, then it is only possible by delivering instruction in such a way
which matches best to each learner’s way of learning information.

85
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

REFERENCES

Altun, F. & Yazıcı, H. (2010) Learning styles of the gifted students in Turkey. Procedia Social and
Behavioral Sciences 9 (2010) 198–202.

Bailey, P., Daley, C.E. & Onwuegbuzie, A. J. (1999). Foreign language anxiety and Learning
styles. Foreign Language Annals 32 (99), 63-76

Castro, O. & Peck, V. (2005). Learning styles and foreign language learning difficulties. Foreign
Language Annals 38 (5), 401-409.

Dörnyei, Z., (2005). The Psychology of the Language Learner: Individual Differences in Second
Language Acquisition. Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, Mahwah, N.J.

Ehrman, M.E., Leaver, B.L., Oxford, R.L. (2003). A brief overview of individual differences in
second language learning. System 31 (3), 313-330.

Emamipour & Esfandabad, H.S. (2010). A comparative study of learning styles among
monolingual (Persian) and bilingual (Turkish-Persian) secondary school students. Procedia
Social and Behavioral Sciences 5 (2010) 2419–2422.

Farooq, M.S. & Regneir, J. (2011). Role of Learning Styles in the Quality of Learning at Different
Levels. Informatica Economică 15, 28-45.

Gündüz, N. & Özcan, D. (2010). Learning styles of students from different cultures and studying in
Near East University. Procedia Social and Behavioral Sciences 9 (2010) 5–10.

Joycey, P. A. & Kantaridou, Z. (2011). Major, minor, and negative learning style preferences of
university students. System 39 (11), 103-112.

Nel, C. (2008). Learning style and good language learners. In Griffits, C. (Ed.). Lessons from Good
Language Learners. CUP.

Peacock, M. (2011). Match or mismatch? Learning styles and teaching styles in EFL. International
Journal of Applied Linguistics 11, 1-20. Blackwell Publishing.

Razawi, N,A,, Muslim, M., Razali, S.M.C., Husin, N. & Samad, N.Z.A. ().Students’ Diverse
Learning Styles In Learning English As A Second Language. International Journal of
Business and Social Science 2 (2011) 179-186.

Reid, J.M. (Ed.) (1998). Understanding Learning Styles in the Second Language Classroom.
Prentice Hall Regents, Upper Saddle River, N.J.

Tabanlioğlu, S. (2003). The Relationship Between Learning Styles and Language Learning
Strategies of Pre-Intermediate EAP Students. METU

Wong, L.L.C. & Nunan, D. (2011). The learning styles and strategies of effective language
learners. System 39 (2011) 144-163.

86
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Appendix A: Survey responses and Chi-square statistics

Learning Styles

Concrete Authority-oriented Communicative

Effective 13 10 8

Less effective 25 7 3

Df: 3 Sig: 0,072

1. Hours spent per week on using English off campus

Less than 1 hour 1-5 5-10 More than 10 hours

Effective 13 14 4 3
Less effective 30 9 0 1

Df: 3 Sig: 0,006

2. Regular classes conducted in English

Lectures:

21-40 41-60 61-80 81-100

Effective 0 1 6 26

Less effective 1 4 6 28

Df: 3 Sig: 0,495

Tutorials

1-20 61-80 81-100

Effective 12 0 4

Less effective 6 1 8

Df: 2 Sig: 0,116

3. Perceptions on the importance of English

Not at all Not very Somewhat Very Extremely

Effective 0 0 2 11 21

Less effective 2 2 7 16 12

87
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Df: 4 Sig: 0,043

4. Rating of English level
Level 1:I know the vocabulary, expressions, and grammar to talk about basic subjects in English. I
can talk about the past and the future.
Level2: I can participate in short social and business conversations in English. I can use the past
and future to talk about everyday subjects.
Level 3: I have the communication strategies to discuss most subjects in English. I know the
vocabulary and expressions to use in most situations.
Level 4: I can understand long conversations in English on unfamiliar topics. I have a solid
understanding of English vocabulary and expressions.
Level 5: I can participate fluently in English in most conversations and discussions on a variety of
topics.

Level 1 Level 2
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5

Effective 6 18 6 1 2

Less effective 23 9 1 3 1

Df: 4 Sig: 0,001

5. Enjoyment of learning English

Not at all Not very Somewhat A lot A great deal

Effective 0 1 12 15 6

Less effective 4 8 18 8 2

Df: 4 Sig: 0,006

6. In English class, I like to learn by reading.

No A little Good Best

Effective 0 10 20 3

Less effective 8 20 10 2

Df: 3 Sig: 0,002

7. In class, I like to learn by games.

No A little Good Best

Effective 4 11 11 8
Less effective 5 6 14 15

Df: 3 Sig: 0,307

88
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

8. In class, I like to learn by pictures, films, video.

No A little Good Best

Effective 0 3 14 17
Less effective 3 6 7 24

Df: 3 Sig: 0,069

9. I want to write everything in a notebook.

No A little Good Best

Effective 7 18 3 6

Less effective 12 18 7 3

Df: 3 Sig: 0,327

10. I like to have my own textbook.

No A little Good Best

Effective 1 8 14 11
Less effective 8 9 9 12

Df: 3 Sig: 0,92

11. I like the teacher to explain everything to us.

No A little Good Best

Effective 1 5 11 17

Less effective 1 13 13 13

Df: 3 Sig: 0,285

12. I like the teacher to give us problems to work on.

No A little Good Best

Effective 2 12 14 6

Less effective 8 18 8 5

Df: 3 Sig: 0,102

89
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

13. I like the teacher to help me talk about by interests.

No A little Good Best

Effective 0 8 16 10

Less effective 3 7 20 10

Df: 3 Sig: 0,385

14. I like the teacher to tell me all my mistakes.

No A little Good Best

Effective 0 4 14 16

Less effective 4 9 10 17

Df: 3 Sig: 0,105

15. I like the teacher to let me find my mistakes.

No A little Good Best

Effective 0 9 19 5

Less effective 5 7 13 15

Df: 3 Sig: 0,013

16. I like to learn English by talking in pairs.

No A little Good Best

Effective 2 9 17 6

Less effective 6 15 11 8

Df: 3 Sig: 0,202

17. I like to learn English in a small group.

No A little Good Best

Effective 1 11 13 9

Less effective 3 14 15 8

Df: 3 Sig: 0,781

90
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

18. I like to go out with the class and practice English.

No A little Good Best

Effective 6 7 9 12
Less effective 6 13 9 11

Df: 3 Sig: 0,680

19. I like to study grammar.

No A little Good Best

Effective 1 15 12 6

Less effective 8 14 10 8

Df: 3 Sig: 0,139

20. I like to learn many new words.

No A little Good Best

Effective 0 4 10 20
Less effective 4 8 19 9

Df: 3 Sig: 0,008

21. I like to practice sounds and pronunciation.

No A little Good Best

Effective 1 6 13 14

Less effective 5 16 10 9

Df: 3 Sig: 0,041

22. I like to learn English words by seeing them.

No A little Good Best

Effective 1 3 15 15

Less effective 3 9 18 10

Df: 3 Sig: 0,186

91
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

23. I like to learn English words by hearing them.

No A little Good Best

Effective 1 2 13 18

Less effective 7 8 16 9

Df: 3 Sig: 0,012

24. I like to learn English words by doing something.

No A little Good Best

Effective 1 4 14 15

Less effective 5 10 16 8

Df: 3 Sig: 0,066

25. At home, I like to learn by reading newspapers, etc.

No A little Good Best

Effective 3 8 15 7

Less effective 12 20 6 2

Df: 3 Sig: 0,001

26. At home, I like to learn by watching TV in English.

No A little Good Best

Effective 3 7 11 13

Less effective 6 12 14 8

Df: , Sig: 0,334

27. At home, I like to learn by using cassettes.

No A little Good Best

Effective 6 15 6 7

Less effective 7 21 10 2

Df: 3 Sig: 0,222

92
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

28. At home, I like to learn by studying English books.

No A little Good Best

Effective 1 18 10 5

Less effective 8 21 8 2

Df: 3 Sig: 0,076

29. I like to learn by talking to friends in English.

No A little Good Best

Effective 2 9 13 10

Less effective 5 17 11 7

Df: 3 Sig: 0,263

30. I like to learn by watching, listening to native speakers.

No A little Good Best

Effective 0 1 8 25

Less effective 6 9 13 12

Df: 3 Sig:0,000

93
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”
November 15-17, 2012 SAMSUN

STUDENTS’ ATTITUDES TOWARD WEB-BASED INSTRUCTION IN AN EFL

SETTING

Gülbin ÖZDEMİR

ABSTRACT

Nowadays, e-learning is thought to have gained more importance due to the technological
innovations in education. E-learning has a great role in foreign language learning and teaching as
well, as it provides the learners and teachers with the opportunity to access online resources and
use them in an effective way. Therefore, the purpose of this study is to investigate EFL students’
attitudes toward web-based instruction in an EFL setting in terms of their gender. 55 sophomores
studying at Çukurova University constitute the participants of the study. Sanders and Morrison-
Shetlar’s (2001) Web-Based Instruction Attitude Scale is employed in the study.

Keywords: Web-based instruction, attitude, language learning, foreign language.

1. INTRODUCTION

Recently, e-learning is thought to have gained more importance due to the technological
innovations in education. E-learning has a great role in foreign language learning and teaching as
well, as it provides the learners and teachers with the opportunity to access online resources and
use them in an effective way. In this context, it is thought to be essential to find out about the
computer attitudes of students and some of the factors affecting their attitudes. Many researchers
found out that gender, age and prior computer experience have a strong influence on the students’
computer attitude (Hunt & Bohlin, 1993; Martinez & Mead, 1988; Moon, 1994). Likewise,
attitudes of the students toward the computer use and the Web could influence Web-based
instruction, as well (Sanders & Morrison-Shetlar, 2001).

Therefore, students’ attitudes toward web-based instruction in an EFL setting are thought to
be essential to investigate. Thus, this study aims at answering the following research questions:

1. What attitudes do the ELT students have toward web-based instruction?

2. Is there any significant difference among the attitudes of the ELT students toward web-
based instruction in an EFL setting in terms of gender?

2. REVIEW OF LITERATURE
2.1. Theoretical Framework
Advancements in technology and internet have encouraged academics to find new ways to
incorporate technology into the curriculum as an extension of the syllabus to enrich the

MA Student, Çukurova University, [email protected]

94
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

instructional experience and promote communication among their students (Karber, 2001; Green,
1996). Therefore, students’ attitudes toward Web-based instruction gained more importance.

2.2. Relevant Studies

Bangery (2004) concluded that the presentation of instructional materials influence the
quality of the students’ learning experience, thus the instructor is expected to help students
understand the instructions in a clear way so that they could be engaged.

Chandler and Maddux (1998) investigated the web use and found that students appreciated
the use of Web as an instructional resource. However, their actual use of the web was relatively
low.
Foster (2003) concluded that there was a positive correlation between instructor’s use of
Web-based training materials and participation of the students and their learning through the Web.

Jiang and Ting (1998) investigated the factors that influence students' perceptions toward
learning through Web-based instruction. They found that students' active participation in online
discussions depends on instructor's emphasis on discussion time and quality.

Sanders and Morrison-Shetlar (2001) examined the students’ attitudes toward Web-
enhanced instruction in an introductory biology course and found that students’ attitudes were
generally positive. Also, female students were found to have more positive attitude than males.

Slattery (1998) suggested that there is a strong connection between the instruction giving
and learning progress, thus the instructor has the responsibility to give the instructions in an
accessible way.

3.METHODOLOGY
3.1. Participants
The population of this study was composed of 55 sophomores in English Language
Teaching Department at Çukurova University in 2012. The majority of the students participating in
the study were female (39 female, 16 male). These students were enrolled in a course entitled
‘Approaches to ELT’. 51 students had their own computers. Most of the students stated that they
had a moderate amount of computer experience.

3.2. The Course

The course required the lecturer and the students to use a blog. During one academic term,
the students found online articles and essays on approaches and methods in language teaching and
share them on the blog. Week by week, they commented on these articles and essays. Also, peer
assessment of the discussion board postings was made.

3.3. Data Collection and Analysis

Web-Based Instruction Attitude Scale developed by Sanders and Morrison-Shetlar’s (2001)

was employed in the study. Its reliability coefficient is 0.78. It consists of 19 questions. 12 uses a
Likert-type response scale with questions about their attitude toward Web-based instruction and
seven questions are about the students’ personal data. The response strongly agree was assigned a

95
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

score of 4, agree a score of 3, disagree a score of 2, and strongly disagree a score of 1. Questions
were written both positively and negatively.

SPSS 11.5 statistical package programme was used in order to analyse the data.
Frequencies and percentages were used. One-way ANOVA was used to figure out if there was a
significant difference in attitudes toward Web-based instruction between females and males.

4. FINDINGS AND DISCUSSION

Table 1: Student Responses in Percentages

No Item SA A D SD p
1 Web-based instruction scares me. 10,6 12,7 49,1 27,3 .365
2 I am uncomfortable answering questions through the
3,6 21,8 54,5 20,0 .571
Web.
3 I am confident about completing assignments through
20,0 21,8 54,5 3,6 .337
the Web.
4 I enjoy taking quizzes through the Web. 30,9 49,1 18,2 1,8 .547
5 I prefer talking to people in person rather than
38,2 32,7 23,6 5,5 .894
communicating through a chat room on the Web.
6 I would rather post questions on the Web through the
5,5 30,9 50,9 12,7 .366
bulletin board than ask them during class.
7 I would rather get class notes from the Web than have
14,5 30,9 43,6 10,9 .082
them handed out in class.
8 I prefer to have the course syllabus handed out to me in
23,6 54,5 16,4 5,5 .600
class rather than print it from the Web.
9 I would rather look up my grades on the Web as 36,4 45,5 16,4 1,8 .596
opposed to getting them from the professor.
10 I am comfortable doing course work through the Web. 18,2 45,5 32,7 3,6 .190
11 I would prefer not to use Web-based instruction in my 7,3 23,6 43,6 25,5 .499
classes.
12 I would rather take quizzes through the Web than on 12,7 27,3 47,3 12,7 .893
paper in class.
SA=Strongly agree, A=Agree, D=Disagree, SD=Strongly disagree

Student attitudes toward Web-based instruction were generally positive. Students seemed
content with the web-based instruction. They felt comfortable working in a Web-based
environment. They agreed that they enjoyed taking quizzes through the Web. They preferred
talking to people in person rather than communicationg in a Web-based environment.

They did not prefer posting questions on the Web to asking them during class. They
disagreed that they would prefer to get class notes from the Web as opposed to have them handed
out in class. In connection with this preference, they stated that they would like to have the course
syllabus handed out in class rather than print it from the Web. However; they preferred to look up
their grades on the Web rather than getting them from the professor. They seemed to prefer to use
Web-based instruction in their classes.

96
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

No specific difference was found between the female and male students. This indicates that
there is an agreement among the female and male students in the context of Web-based instruction.

The study indicates parallel results with the results with some of the previous studies
(Sanders & Morrison-Shetlar, 2001; Chandler & Maddux, 1998). The students were found to have
positive attitudes toward Web-based instruction and they appreciated the use of Web in their
classes. However; no significant difference was found among the female and male students in this
study. This might have been due to the number of female students since there are more female
students than male students who participated in the study.

5. CONCLUSION AND SUGGESTIONS

Student responses were observed to be positive. After the course, the students continued to
take courses requiring Web-based instructional modules and they seemed comfortable and
motivated. Thus, lecturers might use the Web for the course requirements such as syllabi, articles,
essays, activities and grades.

Furthermore, the students stated that they did not prefer to post their questions on the Web
to ask them during class. It could be said that they need simultaneous feedback from the instructor
and therefore they prefer to discuss their questions with the instructor during the class since it
might not be possible to do that on the Web if the instructor is not online at the same time. Also, it
might have resulted from their insufficient technological knowledge or limited access to computer
labs at campus. All in all, simultaneous feedback seems to be essential for the students.

Moreover, the students preferred to have the course syllabus handed out in class rather than
print it from the Web. This might have been due to their financial situation. Not all the students
may be able to have a printer at home or enough money to print the syllabus from the Web.

Additionally, the students stated that they would like to look up their grades on the Web
rather than getting them from the professor. This would be because they would like to learn their
grades on their own and would not like to share the grades with their classmates. Or it could be
tiring if the professor is so busy and his/her office is full of students who would like to hear about
their grades. The Web would provide them with the opportunity to access their grades individually
and they would feel more comfortable.

For further studies, age and different departments would be taken into consideration and
number of the student would be increased.

97
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

REFERENCES

Bangery, A. W. (2004). The Seven Principles of Good Practice: A framework for evaluating online
teaching. Internet & Higher Education, 7(3), 217-232.

Chandler, B., & Maddux, C. D. (1998). Student use of instructors’ Web sites. In S. McNeil, J. D.
Price, S. Boger-Mahall, B. Robin & J. Willis (Eds.) Technology and teacher education
annual 1998. (ERIC No. ED 421 152)
Foster, B. (2003). Online teaching of mathematics and statistics. Teaching mathematics and its
applications, 22(3), 145-153.

Green, K. C. (1996). Campus computing, 1995. The sixth national survey of desktop
computing in higher education. Encino, CA Campus Computing (ERIC NO. ED 394 383)

Hunt, N. P., & Bohlin, R. M. (1993). Teacher education students’ attitudes toward using
computers. Journal of Research on Computing in Education, 25(4), 487-497.

Jiang, M., & Ting, E. (1998). Course design, instruction, and students' online behaviors: A study of
instructional variables and student perceptions of online learning. Paper present-ed at the
annual meeting of the American Educational Research Association, San Diego, CA. (ERIC
No. ED 421 970).

Karber, D. J. (2001). Comparisons and Contrats in Traditional Versus On-Line Teaching in

Management. Higher Education in Europe, 26(4), 533-536.

Martinez, M. E., & Mead, N. A. (1988). Computer competence: The first national assessment
(Report No. ETS-17-CC-01). Princeton, NJ: National Assessment of Educational Progress.

Moon, S. (1994). The relationships among gender, computer experience, and attitudes toward
computers. (ERIC No. ED 381 142)

Sanders, D. W. & Morrison-Shetlar, A. I. (2001). Student Attitudes toward Web-Enhanced

Instruction in an Introductory Biology Course. Journal of Research on Computing in
Education. 33(3), 251-262.

Slattery, J. M. (1998). Developing a Web-assisted class: An interview with Mark Mitchell.

Teaching of Psychology, 25(2), 152-155.

98
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”
November 15-17, 2012 SAMSUN

EFFECTIVE WAYS OF TEACHING VOCABULARY

İrfan TOSUNCUOĞLU

ABSTRACT

The purpose of this presentation is to encourage teachers to teach vocabulary activities into their
classes. Even Robert Lado (1955) talked about patterns of difficulty in vocabulary teaching. He
highlighted key issues related to words, the native language factor and about patterns. We try to present
the ways to help students understand the complexities of vocabulary learning. As we know, the word
learning is a complex task and word knowledge involves a range of skills, and word learning is facilitated
by approaches that provide varied experiences.
Our first idea to realize that it is important for teachers to acknowledge and for students to understand.
Our students realize that the important role vocabulary acquisition plays in all aspects of their language
learning. In our conversation classes we do not always use separate vocabulary builders. Instead, the words
on our vocabulary list come from the different contexts of the reading passages and discussions about
them. It is not enough to do just one activity with a word. Students must learn about the words in a variety
of interactive ways, and their active participation in the learning process plays an important role.
The other objective of this presentation is using useful and more effective ways of teaching vocabulary
and getting all students involved in a group activity. There are many ways to make an activity fun. Well-
chosen pictures, cards, flashcards and other visual aids, as well as realia in general and so on and so forth,
are usually of great help. It is always a good idea to have students change seating arrangements, work in
groups, and complete short activities. Moreover, try to create humorous situations for role-plays and
dialogues. The use of games as an effective learning tool is inestimable and makes their learning more
pleasurable and meaningful.
In conclusion an efficient language teacher can use selected vocabulary activities or can use integrated
activities. All this depends upon ability and level of understanding and interest of the learners. We can say
that vocabulary activities into classes does take extra time of the teacher. However, designing these kinds
of activities becomes easier the more you do them. Helping students understand and giving them the tools
to learn vocabulary effectively, and making them work with the words regularly, can help them develop
more systematic and effective ways of learning vocabulary.

Keywords: Vocabulary, discussion, teaching, effective ways, communication

1. INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this presentation is to encourage teachers to incorporate vocabulary activities
into their classes. Even Robert Lado (1955) talked about patterns of difficulty in vocabulary
teaching. He drew attention to key issues related to words, the native language factor and language
patterns. We try to present ways to help students understand the complexities of vocabulary
learning. As we know, word learning is a complex task, and word knowledge involves a range of
skills. Word learning is facilitated by approaches that provide varied experiences.


Assist Prof. Dr., Karabük University, [email protected]

99
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Firstly, our students must realize the important role vocabulary acquisition plays in all aspects
of their language learning. In our conversation classes we do not always use separate vocabulary
builders. Instead, the words on our vocabulary lists come from the different contexts of the reading
passages and discussions about them. Teachers must understand that it is not enough to do just one
activity with a word. Students must learn about the words in a variety of interactive ways, and their
active participation in the learning process plays an important role.
The other objective of this presentation is to highlight useful and more effective ways of
teaching vocabulary and getting all students involved in a group activity. There are many ways to
make an activity fun. Well-chosen pictures, posters, flashcards and other visual aids, as well as
paraphernalia in general are usually of great help. It is always a good idea to have students change
seating arrangements, work in groups, and complete short activities. Moreover, one should to try to
create humorous situations for role-plays and dialogues. The use of games as an effective learning
tool is inestimable and makes student learning more pleasurable and meaningful.

2. PROBLEM

The role of the language teacher today is not as simple as it once was. Every day researchers
are discovering new factors that may play a part in language learning. Today, knowledge of the
linguistic structure of the language is only one of the requirements of a good language teacher.
Teachers should also have broad background knowledge of the social environment that
influences their students, different pedagogical techniques, social and cultural aspects of the
language being taught, and techniques for diagnosing certain psychological characteristics of the
learners. For a language is much more than vocabulary lists and sets of grammar rules, and
language learning is not simply a matter of acquiring a system of linguistic formulas. Language is
a form of communication among individuals in a specific social context. But even more than that,
language is a way of thinking and of processing information. It is a symbol of a culture and
personal identity.
This new, increased responsibility for language learning does not fall entirely on the teacher,
however. The student must also assume more responsibility for and participate actively in the
learning process. In the final analysis, it is the learner who must assimilate the language and allow
it to become part of him. We, as teachers, can only “facilitate” this process.
At the beginning level, most new words learned by students have obvious and immediate
practical uses; they quickly become part of the learners’ everyday English - their productive
vocabulary. Teachers can facilitate this by giving learners opportunities to practice using new
vocabulary items in spoken communication. Good pronunciation--getting the sounds and the stress
right—can be encouraged. However, as students learn more and more words, they will find that
many items seem less immediately useful and are perhaps only occasionally met within the context
of reading or listening material. There seems to be less need for getting students to practice
speaking and using such words. Work on pronunciation can still be useful, but is more likely to be
analytical (e.g. Which is the stressed part in the word?) rather than part of communication practice.

2.1. The Role of Vocabulary in the Classroom

1. Vocabulary is very important and needs to be dealt with systematically in its own right; it is not
simply an addition to grammar or skills lessons.
2. Our job does not finish as soon as a learner is first introduced to some new vocabulary; we need
to help them practice, learn, store, recall and use the items.
3. Training in the use of English-English dictionaries provides learners with a vital tool for self
study.
4. We need to distinguish between vocabulary for “productive” use and for “receptive”
recognition and adapt our classroom work appropriately. This distinction is an important

100
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

consideration for teachers planning vocabulary work. Our receptive vocabulary is the set of words
that we recognize and understand, but tend not to use ourselves.
5. We need to deal not only with single-word lexical items, but also with longer, multi-word
items.
6. After students have seen and heard a new lexical item for the first time, they will need
opportunities to become more familiar with it, and practice recognizing, manipulating and using it.

2.2.Important Points for Teaching Vocabulary

Vocabulary is more important than grammar.
We should not focus on grammar at the expense of vocabulary. New vocabulary should be
introduced in almost every lesson. Fluency is more important than accuracy.
We should be selective in our correction of learners. We need to plan lessons that allow
students to speak freely at times, as well as to speak with restrictions and correction at other times.
Learners should be aware that getting the message across is just as important as getting the English
right.
Learning is more important than teaching.
We should pay more attention to what the students are doing in a lesson, and less to what the
teachers are doing. Student talk is more useful than teacher talk. Learners should get the chance to
answer questions. We should plan our lesson so learners will be able to achieve what they were
unable to do before.
Language is a tool for communication.
Learners need to practice using the language in as realistic and authentic a way as possible.
Grammar study, filling the gaps, etc., are only steps along the way to developing the ability to use
language for real tasks. Classroom language is an important source of input and practice.
Learners are individuals: they learn in different ways and have different needs.
We need to be aware of our individual students’ needs, and cater to them as much as possible.
We need to vary our ways of presenting and practicing language to appeal to different learning
styles. There is no “right way” to learn, and teachers must respect the diverse needs and wants of
our students. We should try as much as possible to get to know our students as people, on a normal
human level.
People learn best when they feel comfortable and relaxed.
We must try to create an atmosphere of trust and mutual respect in our groups. Learners should
feel that they can make mistakes without fear of ridicule. We should not emphasize or exploit the
imbalance in the teacher-learner power relationship. Teachers and learners should be on a first-
name basis. Tasks should be challenging but achievable.
Learners should be involved in the learning process.
We should elicit learners’ input regarding course content. We should give them the opportunity
to evaluate our lessons, and to let us know what they do and do not enjoy about them. We should
respond to and act upon the learners’ input as much as possible. Learners should be aware of their
progress and encouraged to set their own goals.
Learners need to learn how to learn.
We should expose learners to a variety of ways to organize their learning process. Learners
should be aware of the learning strategies they use and we should expose them to other, possibly
better, techniques.

2.3.Suggested Learning Activities

Morning Discussion
The morning discussion makes the class more active, as students can exchange their opinions
and everyone can participate in the discussions. This daily event can improve their ability in
expression and speaking skills and it encourages the students to be more active in class.

101
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

For the first time in their experience, the students will have become users of the language
instead of passive learners. This change of status greatly enhances their sense of achievement,
which has the cumulative effect of promoting communication.
The second feature of the morning discussion lies in the authenticity of the student’s
communication. They become very interested in choosing the topics for discussion, which may
cover social, cultural, ethnical, educational and emotional issues. Other topics to be discussed can
include science and technology, business English, events in other parts of the world, music,
literature and arts, public relations, movies and popular personalities, love of nature and problems
in daily life.
The third feature of the morning discussion is that it helps encourage a relaxed classroom
atmosphere, thereby lessening the students’ anxiety when they use English for communication. We
emphasize that no one should be laughed at in class or be interrupted for pronunciation or grammar
correction.
The morning discussion creates opportunities for students to communicate using a variety of
strategies. Students’ own perceptions of the morning discussion have convinced us that such a
carefully designed class activity could meet their needs, motivate them to be responsible for their
own learning and enhance their interest in authentic communication.
Debates
If your students have reached an advanced level in English, they may enjoy participating in
debates. In order for debates to be successful, however, you must make modifications in the
traditional debate format. When we participate in debates in our native language, for instance, we
sometimes speak on the “pro” side of an issue, whereas our true feelings are on the “con” side, and
vice versa. We do this to improve our debating skills.
Students, on the other hand, need practice in speaking English more than on polishing their
debating skills. They will speak more fluently during a debate if they can represent their true
feelings on an issue. Therefore, if they are directed to defend their actual sentiments, in this way
everyone will find the debate more satisfying. Here are some other suggestions:
1. Describe the debate topic. Ask which student would like to be “pro” and which “con”.
2. Select an equal number of students to speak on each of the two debate “teams.” (A team of two
to four people on each side usually works best.)
3. Allow the students sufficient time to prepare their arguments. They can speak from notes, but
they should not read their presentation.
4. Have the two teams sit in front of the class so that everyone can see them.
5. Appoint one member on each team as the “captain”. The captain will give his presentation first
and summarize the team’s views at the end.
6. Set a three-minute time limit for each presentation. Alternate a presentation by a Team I
member with one by a Team II member.
7. After everyone has given his presentation and the captains have summed up their teams’ views,
class members in the audience can question members of either team. The teacher may also want to
direct questions to team members.
8. End the debate when the subject is exhausted or if the students get involved in a heated
argument. Generally speaking, it is best not to have the audience vote on which team they found
the most impressive since this might touch on the speakers’ sensitivities.

3. WAYS OF PRESENTING NEW VOCABULARY

There are many ways to present a new lexical item to learners so that they can grasp its
meaning. The number is limited only by the creativity of the teacher. The following list is therefore
not intended to be all-inclusive. Neither are the various suggested modes of presentation meant to
be used in isolation. It is quite clear that a combination of several different presentation modes will
often be the most effective.

102
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

3.1.Word Relations
A common way for a teacher to elucidate the meaning of a target word is to relate it to another
word that the students already know. The two most common types of word relations are synonyms
(words similar in meaning) and antonyms (words opposite in meaning). Another useful word
relation is that of the lexical set. One can facilitate the identification of an item by showing to what
class of items it belongs; for example, a “rose” belongs to the class of items “flowers.”
Additionally, one can place the item against other items that are in the same set; for example,
“yellow” belongs with “red,” “blue” and “green,” since it is also a color. The main caution about
using word relations is, of course, that any words used to explain the meaning of the target word
should not be more difficult than the target word itself.

3.2. Pictorial Schemata

Explaining the relations that exist between words can be greatly enhanced by the use of some
form of visual display or diagram. Lindstromberg (1985) calls such instruments “pictorial
schemata,” which may include diagrams, grids, tree charts, or stepped scales. Such diagrams that
show the relations between a number of words can be created in a simple way. Students can be
taught the basic schemata, and thus when new words are presented within the schematic frame,
they can be readily interpreted. A good example is adjective intensification. Once students have
been taught the significance of the simple step diagram, items that have the same relationship can
be taught.

3.3. Definition, Explanation, Examples and Anecdotes

In some sense the English teacher can be considered a walking dictionary. The teacher’s
definition may not be as precise as that of the dictionary, but the teacher has the advantage of
being able to give multiple examples of usage and to discuss the target word at length. Some
words that are difficult to define can be brought to life by relating a short story or by having the
students imagine a set of circumstances from which it becomes possible to deduce the meaning of
the item. For example, if the teacher is explaining the item “a guided tour,” the class may be asked
to imagine a museum or an art gallery in which there is a group of people listening to a man
explaining a picture. The man goes from this picture to the next picture and the people follow him.
The teacher explains that the man is called a guide and the group is on a “guided tour”. If this is
not clear, the teacher can illustrate with another example, perhaps of a guided tour of a city.

3.4. Context
A challenging way to present a new item is by embedding the word in a sentence or couple of
sentences in such a way that it may be possible for the students to guess the meaning of the item.
For example, if the target word is “beg,” the teacher may say, “The little boy begged the man to
follow him. He pulled on his arm and said, ‘Please, please come with me.’” This is a good
technique for helping students to use context to guess meanings; however, there is the danger that
your example may be followed by confused silence when students fail to understand the item,
either because the context chosen by the teacher is unclear to the students or because they have a
problem catching the entire meaning upon the first hearing. It is probably advisable to use this
technique with sentences that can be read, thus giving the students adequate time to process them.

3.5. Word Roots and Affixes

Some teachers claim to have great success by teaching students some of the more common
Greek and Latin roots to be found in English. When these are combined with knowledge of the
most common prefixes and suffixes it may be possible to work out the meanings of a large number
of derived words. For example, having been taught the meaning of the prefix “contra” (against),
students might be able to work out in context that the word “contradiction” has something to do
with speaking against, disagreeing, or not being consistent in meaning.

103
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

4. CONLUSION AND SUGGESTIONS

In conclusion, it is always a good idea to have students change seating arrangements, work in
groups, and complete short activities. Moreover, try to create humorous situations for role-plays
and dialogues. The use of games as an effective learning tool is inestimable and makes their
learning more pleasurable and meaningful. An efficient language teacher can use selected or
integrated activities to teach vocabulary. All this depends upon the ability, the level of
understanding and the interest of the learners. We can say that vocabulary activities introduced in
the classroom do take extra time and effort on the part of the teacher. However, designing these
kinds of activities becomes easier the more one does them. Helping students understand and giving
them the tools to learn vocabulary effectively, and making them work with the words regularly,
can help them develop more systematic and successful ways of learning vocabulary.

104
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

REFERENCES

Brown, H. Douglas. 1994. Principles of Language Learning and Teaching. MA: Newbury House.

Jiang, N. 2004. Semantic Transfer and Its Implications for Vocabulary Teaching in a Second
Language.

Lado R.1955. Bibliography for teachers of English as a foreign language. Washington.

Larsen - Freeman, Diane. 2000. Techniques and Principles in Language Teaching. NY;
Oxford University Press.

Lewis, M. 1997. Implementing the lexical approach. Hove, England: Language Teaching
Publications.

Lindstromberg, S. 1985. Schemata for ordering the teaching and learning of vocabulary.
ELT J, Vol. 39, No. 4. (1 October 1985), pp. 235-243, doi:10.1093/elt/39.4.235

McCarthy, M. and O’Dell, F. 2003. English Vocabulary in Use. Cambridge University Press.

Nation, I. S. P., and J. Newton. 2009. Teaching ESL/EFL listening and speaking. New York:
Routledge.

Nunan, David. 1998. Language Teaching and Learning. Edinburgh; Pearson Education Ltd.

Onushco, Michael, Jr. 2003. Teaching English Communicatively, Bishkek.

Richards, Jack C. and Rogers, Theodore S. 1986. Approaches and Methods in Language
Teaching. Cambridge; Cambridge University Press.

Sinclair, J. 1991. Corpus, concordance, collocation. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Stahl, Steven A.; Nagy, William E. 2006.Teaching word meanings. The literacy teaching series.
Mahwah, NJ, US: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates Publishers.

105
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”
November 15-17, 2012 SAMSUN

ADAPTING MATERIALS IN ENGLISH LANGUAGE TEACHING

İsmail Fırat ALTAY

Abstract:
Language teaching materials make up a very significant place in the area of foreign language teaching, in
our case English language teaching. Because of this reason, teachers of English language should be very
careful in using language materials in their courses. In other words, they should know which material to
use where without causing any confusion in the mind of the learner, and without blocking the teaching-
learning process. Here, the key word is to use the most appropriate materials for the teaching procedure.
But, how can this be realised? The answer makes up the content of this study. What is to be done here is
to change the material according to the necessary measures. In this way new and more usable materials
can be formed. As Cunningsworth (1984 : 65) said “… the course material provides a basis and can
often suggest possibilities for further development, serving as an inspiration to the teacher.” And he adds
“The teacher should be encouraged to move away from dependence on the material which he is using
towards a more creative and independent relationship in which imagination and an understanding of the
students’ difficulties and interests come into prominence.” What is understood form here is that, first the
teacher should not very strict to the coursebook or materials he uses, because they only determine the
borderlines. In this way, with the inspiration he gets from course materials, he can reach more creative
levels. Besides, if the teacher uses his imagination and creativity in forming and adapting materials, he
can overcome difficulties which he may come have in teaching-learning process just like the interest of
the learners. So, adaptation is a very important and indispensable part of the language teaching process,
and it has to be applied when necessary.

Key words: Materials, adaptation, language teaching, material adaptation.

1. INTRODUCTION

As is known, language teaching materials make up a very significant place in the area of
foreign language teaching, so English language teaching. Because of this reason, teachers of
English language should be very careful in using language materials in their courses. In other
words, they should know which material to use where without causing any confusion in the mind
of the learner, and without blocking the teaching-learning process. But, how can this be realised?

Here, the key word is to use the most appropriate materials for the teaching procedure.
However, the appropriate or correct material may not be found easily all the time. So what can be


Asst. Prof. Dr., Hacettepe University, [email protected]

106
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

done? Should the programme be changed into another one? Or should the content of the course be
changed because of inappropriateness of the material? Of course, the answer is “No”. What is to
be done here is to change the material according to the necessary measures. In this way new and
more usable materials can be formed. As Cunningsworth (1984 : 65) said “… the course material
provides a basis and can often suggest possibilities for further development, serving as an
inspiration to the teacher.” And he adds “The teacher should be encouraged to move away from
dependence on the material which he is using towards a more creative and independent relationship
in which imagination and an understanding of the students’ difficulties and interests come into
prominence.” What is understood from here is that first, the teacher should not very strict to the
coursebook or materials he uses, because they only determine the borderlines. In this way, with the
inspiration he gets from course materials he can reach more creative levels. Second, if the teacher
uses his imagination and creativity in forming and adapting materials, he can overcome difficulties
which he may come have in teaching-learning process just like the interest of the learners. So,
adaptation is a very important and indispensable part of the language teaching process.
As a result, material adaptation is not the weakness of the language teacher, but his
strength. The reason is that, by adapting materials, he broadens his perspective and presents new
and more efficient materials to his students. So, the learners reach a higher level of consciousness
in mastering the language and as a logical consequence of this, more successful learning-teaching
atmosphere is realised. No coursebook is perfect, no language teaching material is given by God.
And, adaptation is very natural. Thus, there is no need to have a fear of adapting language
materials, in ELT classrooms, because by the help of adaptation more qualified learners can be
formed.
2. REASONS AND WAYS OF ADAPTING MATERIALS

In the introduction part it is clearly understood that adaptation is necessary in the field of
foreign language teaching. However, what should be focused on are the reasons and ways of
making adapting materials to the classroom usage. The reason lying behind this fact is that there is
a reason behind every adaptation requirement, and also there is a way of adapting the material into
the desired form. In this part, some basic seasons of adapting materials, and the ways of adapting
them to the possible uses will be handled. They will be presented with examples to make the
points clearer and more concrete. So, a better understanding of the issue is going to be realised.
2.1 Aims of the Learner
A language material may require adaptation because of the aims of the learners. That is to
say, if the aim of the material to be used and the aim of the learners do not match, an adaptation on

107
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

the language material may be unavoidable. So, necessary adaptations are carried out by the
language teacher. A good instance to this situation is given in example 1 below.

Example 1: Here, a part from a First Certificate coursebook is adapted into an upper-intermediate
level coursebook which does not look for such an aim. It also aims to be an alternative for
Knockout First Certificate. So, the activities and exercises of the reading passage are adapted to
the current use. The result is as follows.

108
The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

109
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

(Adapted from First Certificate Avenues p.118, 119)

As is seen, the activities are changed completely. The new tasks and activities are designed
to meet the new aim. In this way, the new aim is tried to be achieved. So, an adaptation for the
aim of the learner is realised.

2.2 Approach and Method Followed

Sometimes an adaptation on a material may be necessary because of the approach or

method it follows. That is to say, the approach or method of the material may not match that of the
learning-teaching process in use. So, an adaptation is made. An example of this situation is given
below.
Example 2: In this example, a dialogue from a grammar book is the matter. It is grammar based
in nature. However, the writer makes it very different by adding options to the lines of the dialogue
and by making it an exercise. After it, a discussion point is also given to make the point more
communicative.

110
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Example 3: Similarly, a newspaper article which is published in a Turkish Daily News is used for
the aim of the coursebook according to the approaches and methods that are followed by the book.
The example is just below.

111
The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

112
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Here, the article is used for a more communicative purpose where the ideas of the readers
are asked. Besides, reading is integrated with speaking and writing. So, the material is adapted to
the methods and approaches followed by the coursebook.

2.3 Proficiency or Language Level

Proficiency and the language level of the material to be used may not always meet the
needs of the learners. In such situations, some adaptations are required to meet the language level
of the learners. By the help of a study like this, the tasks will not be very easy or very difficult for
the learners. So, they will neither be bored nor be discouraged. An example of this kind of
situation is given as follows.

Example 4: Here, the original text lacks the upper-intermediate level requirements of the learners.
So, some additions to the text are made. Also, new grammatical structures are added to make the
grammatical structure of the sentences more complicated. Thus, a more suitable text is formed for
the learners in terms of level.

113
The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

114
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

2.4 Age Level

When the material at hand is not suitable for the age level of the target learners,
some adaptations become necessary. If this is not realised, the material will not meet the
needs of the learners. This situation may have negative effects as lack of motivation,
developing negative attitudes towards learning and English and low success rates. Visual
aids may be very useful for learners of younger learner groups. So, this kind of problems
should be dwelt on when approached. An example of a similar adaptation is presented as
below.

Example 5: Here, a serious topic like environment and animals is supported with some
kind of questionnaires to avoid a boring atmosphere. So, the interest of the learners is
attracted, and the material refers to the target age group after necessary adaptations.

115
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Yes Sometimes No
- Use recycled paper   
- Write on both sides of the paper   
- Reuse envelopes   
- Reuse plastic carriage bags   
- Buy food loose rather than pre-packed   
- Recycle household waste (glass, paper, tins)   
- Buy large size packets (food, washing powder)   
- Use public transport whenever you can   
Is there anything else you do?   
(Write it here) …………………………

116
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Example 6: In this adaptation example, the material is supported with pictures to attract the
interest of the learners and to form a more pedagogic teaching-learning atmosphere. So, the boring
atmosphere is avoided and learners are motivated.

117
The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

118
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

2.5 Learning Styles and Strategies, and Interests

When a material is chosen, the learners’ styles, strategies and interests are also taken into
consideration. In they are not realised in the material, some adaptations are made to realises this
fact. An example of this is given below.

Example 7: Here, the material is on vocabulary teaching. In the original form of the exercise
there is no table like upper part or lower part of the body; however, this is thought to be interesting
for the learners so it s added. Similarly, again in the “b” part there were no picture, but a picture is
added to attract the interest of visual learners. In this way, necessary adaptations are made in the
nature of the material in addition to their original forms.

119
The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

120
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

2.6 Social, Educational and Cultural Background

Social, educational and cultural background of the learner also affects the use of materials,
and causes necessary adaptations as a result. For instance, the items with irrelevant social or
cultural details are eliminated in the ongoing of the course material. The reason is that, they may
negatively affect the learning of the students, or such a thing may not occur in the learner’s culture.
Such an example is given right below.

121
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Example 8: Here, the listening and speaking part is supported with a picture. However, the school
picture provided has a bell up the original figure. This is not an appropriate situation for Muslim
learners, so the upper part of the picture is a bit cup up the upper part. In this way, it is adapted to
the culture of the learners.

122
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

2.7 Ongoing of the Coursebook Series Followed

If the material to be used should follow the ongoing or way of the previous materials, again
some adaptations are necessary. The reason is that there should be a kind of continuity between the
components of the whole. So, the material is adapted according to the ongoing of the previous. An
example to this situation is given below.

Example 9: Here, the presentation of the rule in a table and the form of the excise follows regular
Lifelines format. This is the way grammar is presented there. So as a follow up coursebook, the
new book should follow the same line and make necessary adaptations in the materials used in the
sample units of the target upper-intermediate coursebook. The adapted form is given below both in
table and exercise form.

123
The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

124
The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

125
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

2.8 Economic Reasons

Sometimes in the area of foreign language teaching adaptations may be necessary as a

result of economic constraints. That is to say, as result of economic difficulties the teacher or the
institution may choose the way of making some adaptations. These are generally in the form of
having some frugal behaviours like reusing some pictures, tapescripts or same texts with alterations
and adaptations. An example to this situation is given below.

Example 10: Here, the following listening and speaking activity is based on a listening cassette
the text of which is given right after the exercise part. However, in the way of forming an upper-
intermediate coursebook as an alternative for Knockout First Certificate, because of some
economic reasons, the listening texts of this FC book is used. Of course the design and the content
of the exercises and tasks are changed and adapted to the target use. But, what is a limitation is the
use of the listening material of Knockout because of economic reasons.

126
The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

127
The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

128
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

3. CONCLUSION

To sum up, as far as the presentation of material is concerned, the possible changes on the
nature of materials are also concerned. This is in general what we call adaptation. And it is
sometimes unavoidable. That is why, adapting materials should be applied in the area of English
language teaching when necessary.

Of course, the language teacher does not apply the adaptation of materials randomly.
There are some reasons that make the application of adaptation unavoidable. They are so many in
number; however, here only a few are explained with examples. They are aims of the learners,
approach and method followed, proficiency or language level of the learners, age level, learning
styles, strategies and interest of the learners, social, educational and cultural background of the
learners, ongoing of the coursebook series and economic reasons. These are the main reasons of
adaptations. With these reasons at hand, the language teacher working with the institution can
make necessary adaptations on the material he has. So, new and more appropriate materials are
formed.
As a consequence, if the material at hand does not meet the needs of the learners, necessary
adaptations are made. Here again, the key word is the needs of the learners. If the needs of the
learners are determined with an efficient needs analysis, no doubt the adaptations applied will fit
the situation. Only this way a more productive teaching-learning environment is realised, and more
successful language learners can be formed. Thus, language teachers should be careful in adapting
materials to be used in their classes if they do want to better students educated by them.

129
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

REFERENCES
Briggs, S. J. (1994). Grammar: Strategies and Practice. Illinois. Scott Foresman.

Brown, D. H. (1994). Principles of Language learning and Teaching. Englewood Cliffs: New
Jersey.

Brown, D. H. (1994). Teaching by Principles: An Interactive Approach to Language Pedagogy.

Englewood Cliffs: New Jersey.

Chastain, K. (1986). Developing Second-Language Skills. Orlando: Harcourt Brace

Jovanovich.

Cunningsworth, A. (1984). Evaluating and Selecting EFL Teaching Materials. London:

Heineman.
Flower, J. (1996). First Certificate Organiser. Hove: Language Teaching Publications.

Foll, D. and KELLY A. (1994). First Certificate Avenues. Cambridge: Cambridge University
Press.

Kingsbury, R. (1988). Longman First Certificate. Harlow: Longman.

Stern, H. H. (1991). Fundamental Concepts of Language Teaching. Oxford: Oxford University

Press.
Tarone, E. and YULE, G. (1989). Focus on the Language Learner. Oxford: Oxford University
Press.

Tomlinsen, B. (1998). Materials Development in Language Teaching. Cambridge: Cambridge

University Press.

Ur, P. (1996). A Course in Language Teaching. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Yalden, J. (1987). The Communicative Syllabus. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice Hall.

130
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”
November 15-17, 2012 SAMSUN

GRADATION OF THE COURSE CONTENT IN

ENGLISH LANGUAGE TEACHING

İsmail Fırat ALTAY*

Abstract

As is known syllabus design is a very challenging task in English language teaching. Thus,
in the way of preparing a syllabus, some points have to be considered and some steps have to be
handled. This paper aims to focus on one of the steps that are necessary in syllabus design:
gradation of the course content. In the preparation of the foreign language teaching syllabus, first
of all the educational policy should come so that the whole process can be organised according to
the planned policy. Later, the needs of the learners and related aims and objectives come. After
this step, comes the selection of the course content. Of course while selecting the course content,
the needs of the learners, the aims and objectives are considered in the framework of the education
policy pointed out beforehand. Only after these steps comes the gradation of the course content.
Gradation of the course content is a necessary fact, because it is impossible to present the whole
language material at once. In addition to this, learning of a foreign language is rather sequential.
That is to say, the future learning of the learners depends on the past learning. So, the foreign
language teaching programme should have a good systematic structure in itself. The reason is that,
any gap in the knowledge of the learner may cause problems in learning. Gradation of the course
content is important but how this can be realised? In this paper, this point will be focused on.
Types of gradation will be handled with their weak and strong points. In this way a better
understanding of the term gradation will tried to be realised. Lastly, factors affecting the gradation
of the material to be taught are going to be handled in this study.

Key words: Syllabus, gradation, course content, gradation of course content

1. INTRODUCTION

As is known syllabus design in teaching is a very challenging task. This matter may
become more complicated if the syllabus which is focused on is about language teaching, in our
concern foreign language teaching. Thus, in the way of preparing a syllabus for foreign language
teaching, some points have to be considered and some steps have to be handled. This paper aims to
focus on one of the steps that are necessary in syllabus design: gradation of the course content.

In the preparation of the foreign language teaching syllabus, first of all the educational
policy should come so that the whole process can be organised according to the planned policy.
Later, the needs of the learners and related aims and objectives come. After this step, comes the
selection of the course content. Of course while selecting the course content, the needs of the
learners, the aims and objectives are considered in the framework of the education policy pointed
out beforehand. Only after these steps comes the gradation of the course content. Thus, gradation
has a significant place in the preparation of the foreign language teaching syllabus.

*
Asst. Prof. Dr., Hacettepe University, [email protected]

131
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Sometimes instead of the term ‘gradation’ grading or sequencing can be used in some
sources. However, the term gradation would be most suitable to use, because the term grading is
used for the marking of tests, and from sequencing it can be misunderstood that the ordering of
material to be learned only consists of arranging items in a certain sequential order, whereas this sis
not the sole purpose. Gradation of the course content is a necessary fact, because it is impossible to
present the whole language material at once. In addition to this, the learning of a foreign language
is rather sequential. That is to say, the future learning of the learners depends on the past learning.
So, the foreign language teaching programme should have a good systematic structure in itself.
The reason is that, any gap in the knowledge of the learner may cause problems in learning.
Consequently, it can be understood that a kind of systematic grading is necessary.

In the last paragraph it was pointed out that a kind of grading is necessary in learning
teaching process. Now the problem is that how this can be realised. In the third part of this paper
this point will be focused on. Types of gradation will be handled with their weak and strong points.
In this way a better understanding of the term gradation will tried to be realised. But before this, a
point should be dwelt on as well. This point is the factors affecting the gradation of the course
content. Thus, factors affecting the gradation of the material to be taught are going to be handled
now.

2. FACTORS AFFECTING THE GRADATION OF COURSE CONTENT

It is known that in the selection of the content of the course some factors were considered
to be important, and they were taken into consideration. Just like this, in the gradation of the
course content there are some other factors that play a significant role as a natural outcome. In this
paper, these factors will be classified as internal and external factors affecting the gradation of the
course content.

2.1 Internal Factors

As far as the internal factors affecting the gradation of the course content is concerned,
mainly the points directly related to the learner will be handled. That is to say, the learner will be
taken as the core and the factors related to the learned will be handled. These factors can be listed
as follows:



The age of the learner


Aims and needs of the learner


Interests of the learner


Cultural background of the learner


Learning style and strategies of the learner


The attitude of the learner towards English or learning
Educational background of the learner

Such factors may contribute completely or partially to the gradation of the course content.
Sometimes they may have direct sometimes they may have indirect effects on the gradation of the
course content. No matter how they affect the gradation, they should not be neglected and they
must be evaluated for the formation of a well-formed syllabus.

132
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

2.2 External Factors

In addition to the internal factors there are some other factors which affect the gradation of
the course content as well. Here, the factors apart from the learner will be named as external
factors. For instance choosing a certain type of gradation may depend on the total numbers
devoted to the teaching of the language may be a good example as an external factor affecting the
gradation of the course content. Whether the mentioned hours are allotted in a long period of time
or in a shorter period of time is another fact that should be kept in mind. Even the total number of
the learners having the course in the same class may affect the gradation as well, since it affects the
time allocated for each learner. Here it can be understood that even the physical conditions of the
teaching atmosphere can affect the gradation of the course content. Thus, external factors which
affect the grading of the course content should never be neglected, and they should be given place
in the syllabus that is formed.

3. TYPES OF GRADATION

It is an undeniable fact that gradation of the course content is a very necessary issue.
However, there is not a single way of gradation of the material to be presented to the learners. The
reason hidden can be based on the factors affecting the gradation of the course content; internal
factors and external factors. That is why, many types of gradation are farmed. Here they will be
presented in two separate branches: Linear and cyclic gradation, and grammatical, situational and
functional-notional gradation.

3.1 Linear and Cyclic Gradation

In the design of any language course or syllabus a main distinction is made between linear
and cyclic gradation. By grading what is meant here is the speed with which the students progress,
how much new material is introduced in a given number of hours, how close together or how far
apart new grammatical structures are in relation to each other, how much new vocabulary is
introduced in each unit. In some sources linear gradation can be called successive gradation, and
cyclic gradation is called spiral or concentric gradation. No matter what they are called, linear and
cyclic gradation forms the basis of gradation, and therefore, they will be handled at first.

3.1.1 Linear gradation

“In a typically linearly ordered course the items are presented one by one in a strictly linear
sequence which is maintained throughout the course. Each item is discussed in detail, and the aim
is to attain complete command of the item before proceeding to the next item”, (Van Els et al,
1984:227). In other words, a course with a linear gradation deals with each item exhaustively
before passing on to the next item. The advantage of this kind of gradation is that each new item is
thoroughly learned, and prepares a platform for the next unfamiliar item. Such a graded course or
syllabus is mostly suitable for the learners who learn the target language for the first time without a
past learning experience or knowledge. For instance, in a linear graded course, 5 or 6 units are
devoted to present simple and later again 5 or 6 units are devoted to the present continuous. In this
respect, after the 5 or 6 units are handled, the course does not allow the learner to look back to the
previously learned items. It moves on the new learning point.
However, nowadays linear gradation is not used much. A close-up research of the last
years reveal the fact that linear graded courses and syllabuses are not used popular due to some
facts. These facts can be defined as the shortcomings or the disadvantages of linear gradation.
Here are a few of them:

 In a strictly linear ordered course an item is presented only once. It is practiced

intensively and later in the progressive units it is largely ignored. The course may have
revision units; however, in these units, the course material is revised only briefly.

133
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

 Progress of the learners is very slow at first. The reason is that each item is discussed in
detail in long period of time. It takes a very long time for the learner to use the language
communicatively in a communicative situation. This may have negative effect on the
motivation of the learner, since the knowledge they get will not be in use for a very long
time.

As a result of the mentioned negative effects of linear gradation, it is not intended to be

used in the last 15 to 20 years. Instead, cyclic gradation is in favour. So, it will be wise to this type
of gradation from now on.
3.1.2 Cyclic gradation
Van Els et al 1984 points out that ”In a course in which the material is graded cyclically
the individual items are not presented and discussed exhaustively, as in a strictly linear gradation.
Only essential aspects of the item in question are presented initially. These items then keep
recurring in the course, and every new time new aspects will be introduced which will be related to
and integrated with what has already been learned.” In this respect there is no logical relation of
dependence to each other, or they are logically independent.

In a cyclic graded course only one or two units are devoted to a particular grammar point;
however, later the grammar point is repeated several times for the sake of repetition and revision.
Thus, such a course or syllabus is mostly suitable for false beginners of language learners. Some of
the advantages of a cyclic graded course can be as follows:

 Progression in the early stages is rather quick. This is a great advantage especially when
compared with linear graded courses where progression is not quick. In this way, the


motivation of the learners is also increased.
By the help of cyclic graded courses or syllabuses the learners pass from receptive skills to
productive ones in a shorter period of time. That is to say, they use the language in
addition to its form and usage. This brings success to them in daily life use and real life


situations.
The revision is carried out in many parts of the syllabus. This is also realised in different
contexts, so the learner learns to use the target language by considering its use in different
contexts. The learner takes the use of target language in different contexts as an example
for him or her.

With all the advantages mentioned, cyclical graded syllabuses or courses have gained great
support among the educators. This is especially true for the last 10 to 15 years. So, it can be said
that with the requirements of the modern world and the learners, cyclic gradation is more popular
than linear gradation.
3.2 Grammatical, Situational and Functional-notional Gradation
In the gradation of a foreign language course the only selection is not made between linear
or cyclic gradation. Decision about which linguistic categories provide the best criteria for the
ordering of the material is also important. So, what is meant here by gradation is the content of the
course. In this respect three other types of gradation comes into being. They are grammatical
gradation, situational gradation and functional-notional gradation.
3.2.1 Grammatical gradation
Grammatical gradation assumes that language learning can best be realised by ordering the
language material selected primarily on the basis of its structures. The reason is that, according to
grammatical gradation structures of a language constitute the most important elements of that
language. That is why, sometimes grammatical gradation is referred to as structural gradation.

134
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

In a typically grammatical graded language course the units centre around one or more
syntactic or morphological structures. In such a course, the units are generally named as the
structure they focus on, for instance past simple or singular forms. In this way, structures are
focused on more than any other component of the language.
With all its properties at hand grammatical gradation has gained some objections. Here a
few of them are mentioned.

 In a grammatical graded course or syllabus the emphasis is on a command of the morpho-

syntactic rule system. However, what is needed for any language learner is verbal
communication more than the structure itself. It should be kept in mind that linguistic
forms or simply grammar provide a means to an end that the end itself is to communicate.
So, foreign language teaching should focus on the development of communicative


competence as well as linguistic competence.
Secondly, many grammatical graded courses or syllabuses lack of enough lexical content.
They try to limit the presentation of lexical material in the first stages of foreign language
learning so as to be able to pay much more attention to the target structure. They aim to
focus on vocabulary for later years. Therefore, as a result of such a syllabus, the learner
may have a command of the rule, but he may not be able use that structure depending on
his lack of vocabulary.

To sum up, grammatical gradation is based on the grading of the course content on
structures of the target language. In this respect, much more attention is given to the grammatical
competence than communicative competence. Besides, lexical items are neglected. As a
consequence, it can said to have some shortcomings in the field of foreign language teaching.
3.2.2 Situational gradation
In grammatically graded syllabuses learners had a great command of the grammar of the
target language they aim to learn; however, they were unable to apply what they know in actual
communicative situations. So, this led to the birth another type of gradation as far as the gradation
of the course content is concerned and situational gradation formed. In situational gradation the
use of the language is considered more important than the knowledge of the language. In another
way, communicative competence is the first aim not linguistic competence. In addition to this,
learners are expected to communicate effectively in the given situations. Thus, units of a
situational graded course can be called ‘At school’, ‘In the market’ or ‘Asking the way’. Since the
situational approach takes communication in connection with the place they are uttered in, the
environment of communication is also very significant in this respect. So, the physical
environment determines the basic components of the language in use.
In situational courses the language is used more an the learners have a great command of
the language they use. So, they compensate their deficiency which they have in grammatical
graded courses. However, situational graded courses have attached some objectives as well. Here
are a few of them:

 In a strictly situational course or syllabus the emphasis is on the communication. So, the
structure of the language s neglected. If the situation goes on like this from the elementary
level to higher levels, a complete command of the grammar of the target language cannot
be realised at the end. At the end, learners may communicate at some level, but their
linguistic background may be deficient in most respects.

135
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

 The excessive relation between the linguistic content of the utterances and the physical
environment may cause problems as well. In this way, it may be very difficult for the
learner to apply what he has learned in situations which have not been dealt with in the
course.

These points can be considered as the weak points of situational graded syllabuses. In
addition, theses weak points can be eliminated by a balanced study on the content of the syllabus.
This means that, if the situational syllabus is not a very strict one, the learners may not face so
many problems. As a result, this type of gradation has gained a great deal of use in class.

3.2.3 Functional-notional gradation

In the recent years new approaches to gradation have raised great interest among the
scholars in the field of foreign language learning and teaching. One of them is functional-notional
gradation. Functional-notional gradation includes language functions and notions in addition to the
forms of the language. So, it can said to have a broader perspective than situational gradation.
As Van Els et al quoted from Wilkins (1976), “The advantage of functional-notional
syllabus is that it takes the communicative facts of language into account from the beginning
without losing sight of grammatical and situational factors.” In his way, a functional-notional
syllabus is superior to grammatical syllabus, because it will produce a communicative competence,
and sustain the motivation of the learners. It is superior to situational syllabus, because the most
important grammatical forms are included in addition to all kinds of language functions.
Therefore, a functional-notional graded syllabus or course is more powerful in general than simply
situations.
A functional-notional syllabus is cyclically graded in nature. In the first cycle, the
functional-notional categories of the course content is simple without any complicated structure.
Later, in the next cycle, these categories are taken up again, but his time the language material is
more complex. This cycle goes on more if the structure is complicated in nature. This helps the
learner to overcome difficulties he may face when the whole structure in addition to the functions
and notions are presented. So, cyclic nature of functional-notional gradation can said to be learner
friendly.
With all these good sides, functional-notional graded courses or syllabuses are not perfect.
They have some shortcomings as well. Here not an objective against this kind of gradation, but a
limitation of it is given below:

 A strictly functional-notional syllabus is very practical to use in advanced classes;

however, it is not very easy to practice in elementary courses. The reason is that, focusing
on the functions, notions and structures all together is not an easy matter for the learners
at elementary level. So, such an application is not very easy in a strictly functional-
notional course. Besides, if the course content is a bit changed due to the needs of the level
and the needs of the learners, this difficulty may be eliminated.

To sum up, functional-notional graded courses or syllabuses have many advantages when
compared to grammatically and situational graded courses or syllabuses. First of all, functional
notional gradation enables the course content to have a communicative nature. In this way, it is
superior to structural gradation. Secondly, it has more structural information and this helps the
learners to overcome difficulties that he may encounter about the linguistic content of the target
language. Third, it has cyclic nature in itself. In this way, the material is presented in a better and
in a way that the learners can benefit more. In addition to the mentioned advantages it has

136
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

limitations as well, just like its narrow area of usage in its strict forms. Consequently, with more
advantages at hand, functional-notional gradation can said to be a better way of gradation, and can
be applied in class atmosphere with all its benefits.

3.3 Programmed Instruction

Programmed instruction is an innovative way of teaching. It is presented as an alternative
way which may help learners to overcome the difficulties they have in conventional class
atmosphere. So, it can said to be useful in cases it is needed.
In programmed instruction the learners deal with the material to be learned on their own.
They may be assisted only by a learning aid or computer. In addition to these Van Els et al (1984)
gives the basic principles of programmed instruction as follows:



There is a precise description of the target behaviour.


The course content is divided into small, closely linked units called frames.


The learner is informed of his achievements immediately after the completion of each unit.
The learner goes through the programme at his own speed.

As is seen, programmed instruction does not suit to both linear or cyclical graded courses,
since the learner has a great command on the ongoing of the course; either on speed or on the
cycling. However, for more complicated forms of programmed instruction this linear or cyclic
gradation is also presented in the form of the programme.
In a linear model of programmed instruction, the units are very small in order to reduce the
risk of making errors. Each unit gives immediate reinforcement of the learner’s response. The
units are strictly linearly ordered as is seen below

1 2 3 4 5

In contrast with the linear model, in branching model of programmed instruction the units
are generally larger, and the learner can learn from his own errors. If the learner’s answer is right,
he can pass to the next unit. If it is not, then he is referred to an additional link containing remedial
material as is below:

2 5 8
4 7
1

3 6 9

Here it can easily been understood that programmed instruction has gained popularity with
the development of computer technology and computer assisted language learning (CALL) or
computer assisted language instruction (CALI). In this respect it can be said that developing
technology helps the learners in forming the most suitable grading for them in learning a foreign

137
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

language. However, a question still remains unanswered. How exactly can a language be learned
through a programmed syllabus which is based mainly on conditioning and verbal behaviour? This
seems to be the weakest point of programmed instruction. In addition to this deficiency,
programmed instruction also fails in teaching productive skills where a mutual instruction is
needed more than a one sided computer atmosphere. So, with some disadvantages at hand,
programmed instruction seems to require more time for its development.

4. CONCLUSION

To sum up, it has been clear that in foreign language teaching gradation has a great
importance. In order to have the most suitable gradation for the learner, what needs to be done is to
have a deep understanding of the needs of the learner. Only in this way the best gradation type can
be chosen, and it can be beneficial for the learners.

In the course content of foreign language teaching, it observed that the subjects are closely
related, and they are sequentially in character. Therefore, learners may have great difficulty in
filling up any gap in their skills or knowledge. So, a cyclical graded course can be suggested for
the learners of foreign language learners than a liner one. However, here the background
knowledge of the learners should be considered as well. Likewise, a functional-notional graded
course can be beneficial since it provides both linguistic and communicative competence for the
learners. But, again the learners may focus on a structural graded course if they need a structural
background for them in an exam that they will have like KPDS. They may also need survival
English for which situations are more important, so communicative competence is the first aim of
the learners. In this respect there is not a single gradation type which can used for all kind of
learners with different aims but different types of gradation for different purposes. Here what
should be done is to focus on the learner first. The needs analysis is on the agenda again. Based on
the findings of the needs analysis, the educators should choose the best one for their learners. Here
the contribution of the learners to the choice can be utilised too. So, a better and more
sophisticated result can be reached.

Consequently, there is no perfect gradation type of gradation. The experts of this field
have proposed some other types over some others, but these depend on the type of use as well. So,
what we should do as teachers of English is to know our learners as good as possible, so that we
can find the best type of gradation for them. In this way, both they and we will reach the aim of
success in foreign language teaching, and only this target can totally satisfy us.

REFERENCES

Celce-Murcia, Marianne and HILLES, Sharon (1988). Techniques and Resources in Teaching
Grammar. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Rivers, M. Vilga (1981). Teaching Foreign Language Skills. Chicago: The University of Chicago
Press.

Stern, H. H. (1991). Fundamental Concepts of Language Teaching. Oxford: Oxford University

Press.

Ur, Penny (1996). A Course in Language Teaching. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Van Els et al (1984). Applied Linguistics and the Learning and Teaching of Foreign Languages.
New York: Edward Arnolds

138
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”
November 15-17, 2012 SAMSUN

AN INTERCULTURAL OUTLOOK ON THE “NATIVE SPEAKER

INSTRUCTOR” FACTOR AND ITS REFLECTIONS ON THE STUDENTS’
ATTITUDES TOWARDS SPEAKING COURSE

İsmail YAMAN *

ABSTRACT

Speaking is one of the most demanding and multi-faceted dimensions of the language learning
process as one of the productive skills. Therefore, a considerable amount of attention should be paid to the
enhancement of the students’ speaking skill. Because of the cultural dimension and their better command of
English, native English-speaker teachers are preferred in some colleges and universities. The major aim is to
better the speaking performances of students. But, is it really useful to employ native speakers for English
courses? How do the students perceive the learning process with native speaker instructors? Are there radical
differences between the students’ perceptions as to native and non-native instructors? This study focuses on
such questions and aims to reveal whether the “native speaker instructor” factor makes a significant
difference in terms of the students’ attitudes towards the speaking course or not. The subject group of the
study consists of students attending the ELT Prep-class at Ondokuz Mayıs University in 2011 – 2012
academic year. There are two groups covered in the study each including 25 students. The first group is
taught by a native English-speaking teacher while the second group is taught by a non-native English-
speaking teacher from Turkey. A 20-item likert-type scale (Attitude Scale for Speaking Course) developed
by the researcher is employed as the main data collection tool. The study yielded positive findings in favor of
native-speaker instructor in terms of course-related aspects, language proficiency, cultural aspects, and
instructor-related aspects. The findings indicate that native speaker instructors can constitute a good model
for students considering speaking skill. It is concluded that it can be an effective way to hire native speakers
for speaking courses; however, if there is not such an opportunity the advantages of non-native instructors
should be utilized at utmost level and an ever-developing and flexible approach should be adopted while
designing curricula and teaching procedures.

Keywords: native English-speaking teacher, speaking skill, attitude, culture

1. INTRODUCTION
1. 1 Problem
Speaking is one of the most demanding and multi-faceted dimensions of the language
learning process as one of the productive skills. Without attaining a desirable level in terms of
speaking, one cannot be said to have an adequate command of a language. It constitutes an integral
and indispensable part of any language learning process. Therefore, a considerable amount of
attention should be paid to the enhancement of the students’ speaking skill. While looking for ways
to contribute to the speaking performances of the students, various factors ranging from cultural
ones to linguistic ones should be taken into consideration.

*
Instructor, Ondokuz Mayıs University, [email protected]

139
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Language and culture are two inseparable and integral terms. So, culture can be seen in
every language skill and event. Because of the cultural dimension and their better command of
English, native English-speaker teachers are employed in some colleges and universities. The
major aim is to better the speaking performances of students. But, is it really useful to employ
native speakers for English courses? How do the students perceive the learning process with native
speaker instructors? Are there radical differences between the students’ perceptions as to native and
non-native instructors? This study departs from such questions and aims to explore the reflections
of employing native speaker instructors.
1.2. Research Questions
1- Does the “native speaker instructor” factor make a significant difference in terms of the
students’ attitudes towards the speaking course?
2- Does the “native speaker instructor” factor make a significant difference in terms of the
students’ attitudes towards the speaking course considering course-related aspects?
3- Does the “native speaker instructor” factor make a significant difference in terms of the
students’ attitudes towards the speaking course considering language proficiency?
4- Does the “native speaker instructor” factor make a significant difference in terms of the
students’ attitudes towards the speaking course considering cultural aspects?
5- Does the “native speaker instructor” factor make a significant difference in terms of the
students’ attitudes towards the speaking course considering instructor-related aspects?

1.3. Aim and Significance of the Study

This study aims to reveal whether the “native speaker instructor” factor makes a significant
difference in terms of the students’ attitudes towards the speaking course or not. By specifying to
what extent the native speaker instructor provides contributions to the lesson and students, this
study also aims to show whether preferring native speaker instructors is a correct choice or not. The
study also aims to show the ways in which native speaker instructors differ from other non-native
instructors from the students’ perspective on an intercultural basis.
The findings gathered following this study will shed a partial light upon the efficacy level
of “the native speaker instructor factor” in an EFL context. It will serve a different perspective in
terms of cultural awareness and cultural communication in the language class. In line with the
findings of the study, implications for language teaching will be specified and recommendations for
language educators will be presented in order to contribute to the existing body of data and
research.

1.4. Definitions
Attitude: “Attitude is an evaluative reaction to some referent or attitude object, inferred on the
basis of the individual’s beliefs or opinions about the referent” (Gardner, 1985).
Culture: “Culture ... is that complex whole which includes knowledge, belief, art, law, morals,
custom, and any other capabilities and habits acquired by man as a member of society” (Tylor,
1871).
Native Speaker: “A person who has a specified language as the mother tongue or first-learned
language” (Longman Dict.)

140
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

1.5. Limitations
1. This study is limited to 25+25 ELT prep students attending Ondokuz Mayıs University in
2011-2012 academic year.
2. This study is limited to the findings gathered from the questionnaires addressed to ELT
prep students attending Ondokuz Mayıs University in 2011-2012 academic year.
3. This study is limited to the context of Ondokuz Mayıs University.

2. REVIEW OF LITERATURE
2.1. Theoretical Framework
Speaking skill is the most important dimension while learning a new language. Because,
language is mainly oral and it is used mostly for communicative purposes. As communication is an
indispensable phenomenon in people’s daily lives, it is possible to say that oral language is prior to
written one. Although it is quite important to develop speaking skills, it is comparatively harder to
attain a desirable level in terms of speaking considering other skills like writing, reading, and so on.
Therefore, it can be inferred that speaking skill deserves far more attention effort in a language
learning process.
In this context, the question “What makes Speaking Difficult?” comes to fore and calls for
a reasonable answer. Brown lists the factors rendering the speaking skill more difficult than the
other skills as follows (2001):
– Clustering: fluent speech is phrasal, not word by word
– Redundancy: a broad variety of language forms, alternatives, etc.
– Reduced Forms: especially in daily speech
– Colloquial Language: idioms, etc.
– Rate of Delivery: speed
– Stress, Rhythm, intonation
– Interaction
Factors like the ones listed above make speaking harder to develop, so it is better to attach
a considerable amount of importance to it. In order to achieve this, interaction in the classroom
should be focused on. Because languages are for communication, classrooms can be regarded as
mini-societies. All the participants are involved in a verbal and non-verbal interaction in the
classroom atmosphere. Interaction in L2 context entails the learner’s active involvement in such
communicative activities as clarification, confirmation, comprehension checks, requests, reacting,
etc (Kumaravadivelu, 2006). Likewise, Wong and Fillmore (1989) report that social processes are
as important as cognitive processes for successful L2 development. In a similar direction, studies of
Donato and Adair-Hauck (1992) put an emphasis on the importance of social interaction and
involvement in communication in terms of language learning. All these point out the importance of
the speaking skill and the gravity of communicative activities and approaches in order to contribute
to its development.
Communication between people also involves cultural aspects. TESOL has always had as
its goal the facilitation of communication among people who do not share the same language and
national culture (Kramsch, 2001). Some of the major facets of human interaction that the field of
intercultural communication has helped to define (Kramsch, 2001):
– Their non-verbal and paraverbal behavior.
– The way they structure their discourse to meet their communicative goals.

141
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

– The attitudes, values and beliefs they share with the social group they belong to.
– The way their language reflects these deeper discourses.
– The way members of different groups realize various speech acts (like making
compliments, requests, apologies, etc.)

Under the framework of inter-cultural dimension involved in language learning process,

Rivers (1981) states that students need to know:
– culturally acceptable way of interacting orally with others– appropriate levels of
language to use in different situations;
– conversational gambits;
– what gestures and other body language are appropriate;
– when one might intervene in conversation and when one should wait for others;
– which questions and comments might be made and which would offend.

In the light of what Kramsch (2001) and Rivers (1981) say, it can be concluded that
cultural aspects are worth attention and in order help students attain a desirable level in their
speaking skills, intercultural phenomena should also be taken into consideration and
communication should be given priority.

2. 2 Dichotomy of NEST (Native English-speaking teacher) and Non-NEST (Non-

native English-speaking teacher)
“Who is a native speaker?” A person born in an English-speaking country? Can we regard
a person who was born in England and moved to another country at the age of 3 as a native
speaker? These questions and more are all waiting for answers. In this very context, the question of
ownership of English comes onto the agenda. Related with this issue, Widdowson (1994: 385)
says: “It is not a possession which native speakers lease out to others, while still retaining the
freehold. Other people actually own it”. Holding a parallel view with that of Widdowson, Norton
(1997: 427) points out that “English belongs to all the people who speak it, whether native or non-
native, whether ESL of EFL, whether standard or nonstandard”. It can be concluded that it is not
politically correct to make a native and non-native distinction; however, it is an undeniable fact that
native speakers are more valued in language teaching in comparison with non-natives.
According to Medgyes (2001: 432), “language schools which advertise themselves as
employing only native English speakers often do so with the excuse that NESTs are better for
public relations and improve business”. Medgyes (2001: 434) makes the following assumptions as
to the difference between NESTs and Non-NESTs:
- NESTs and Non-NESTs differ in terms of their language proficiency;
- They differ in terms of their teaching behavior;
- The discrepancy in language proficiency accounts for most of the differences found in
their teaching behavior;
- They can be equally good teachers on their own terms.

142
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Briefly, there are clear differences between NESTs and Non-NESTs. However, the answer
for the question “Which one of them is more advantageous” depends on various variables. Perhaps,
it is more reasonable to define these variables and analyze the issue in terms of what kind of
features constitutes the pros and cons of both parties.

2.3. Relevant Studies

Most of the studies conducted to find out whether NESTs are useful or not yielded findings
in favor of natives. For example, the study conducted by Medgyes (2001: 434) with the
participation of 325 teachers from 11 countries (%86 non-native, %14 native) yielded positive
results in terms of NESTs. When asked whether they perceived any differences in teaching
behavior between NESTs and non-NESTs, 82 percent of the participants gave a positive answer.
Likewise, the study of Lasagaster and Sierra (2002) on 76 undergraduates indicates that there is an
apparent preference for native speaker teachers. Implications of Medgyes’ (2001) study are as
follows:
Nests Non-Nests
Speak better English Speak poorer English
Use real language Use bookish language
Use English more confidently Use English less confidently

Adopt a more flexible approach Adopt a more guided approach

More innovative More cautious
More casual Stricker
Less committed More committed

Focus on; Focus on;

Fluency Accuracy
Meaning Form
Language in use Grammar rules
Oral skills Printed words
Colloquial registers Formal registers

Teach items in context Teach items in isolation

Tolerate errors Correct errors
Set fewer tests Set more tests
Use no L1 Use more L1
Assign less homework Assign more homework

Supply more cultural information Supply less cultural information

143
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

In a different study on NESTs and Non-NESTs, İnceçay and Atay (2008) aimed to find out
the students’ attitudes towards both types of teachers. The study was conducted on 18 students via
interviews. The results of the study have shown that the EFL learners have different attitudes
towards NTs and NNTs. e.g. The students showed more tendency to initiate conversations, to use
target language and to form longer sentences in the native speaker’s lesson. The three studies cited
here yielded positive findings and implications in favor of NESTs and put the native side in an
advantageous position.

3.METHODOLOGY
3.1. Participants
The subject group of the study consists of students attending the ELT Prep-class at
Ondokuz Mayıs University in 2011 – 2012 academic year. There are two groups covered in the
study and each group includes 25 students. The first group is taught by a native English-speaking
teacher while the second group is taught by a non-native English-speaking teacher.
3.2. Data Collection and Analysis
A 20-item likert-type scale (Attitude Scale for Speaking Course) formulated by the
researcher in order to specify the attitudes of the students towards the speaking course is employed
as the main data collection tool. The scale is composed of four main parts. The first part is
composed of course-related items; the second part is related with the language proficiency of the
learner; the third part is composed of culture-related items and the fourth part consists of instructor-
related items. Following the pilot study employing the scale on 60 prep-class students, Cronbach’s
Alpha Reliability Co-efficient was found as 0,84 through which the scale proved to be reliable and
applicable.
The statistical analyses of the study have been conducted via Mann–Whitney U test which
is a non-parametric statistical hypothesis test for assessing the level of significance. The
significance threshold has been accepted as p< 0,05.

4. FINDINGS AND DISCUSSION

The study yielded positive findings in terms of native-speaker instructor in terms of course-
related aspects, language proficiency, cultural aspects, and instructor-related aspects. The findings
yielded by the study are parallel with the other studies cited before (Medgyes, 2001, Lasagaster and
Sierra, 2002, İnceçay and Atay, 2008) which also reports findings to the favor of native speaker
instructors. Below are the statistical analyses of the findings yielded by this study:
Course-related Aspects:
The first 5 items of the scale is concerned with course-related aspects and they mainly
focus on motivation variable. Below is the related table:
Table -1. Statistical Analysis of Items Linked with Course-related Aspects
Sum of
Group N Mean Rank U Z P
Ranks
1 (NEST) 25 13 325
2 (Non-
25 38 950 ,00 -6,39 ,00
NEST)
total 50

144
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

It is clear from the above statistical data that NEST has a far more positive impression on
the students in view of course-related aspects. The motivation factor makes the NEST more
favorable in the light of these findings.
Language Proficiency:

Items 6-10 are concerned with the language proficiency of the students. They focus on the
students’ competence about oral tasks or activities. Below is the related table.

Table -2. Statistical Analysis of Items Linked with Language Proficiency

Sum of
Group N Mean Rank U Z P
Ranks
1 25 18,36 459
2 25 32,64 816 134 -3,62 ,00
total 50
As it is obvious from the Table-2, there is statistically significant difference between the
responses of the two groups. Under the category “language proficiency”, except for Item 10, all
items have yielded results to the favor of Nests. Only Item 10 (When my language knowledge falls
short I can always find a way to get my message across) does not have a statistically significant
difference.
Cultural Aspects:

Items 11-15 are concerned with cultural aspects and they mainly cover points like cultural
awareness and willingness to learn about other cultures. Table-3 below shows the statistical
analysis to this end.

Table -3. Statistical Analysis of Items Linked with Cultural Aspects

Sum of
Group N Mean Rank U Z P
Ranks
1 25 20,34 508,5
2 25 30,66 766,5 183,5 -2,876 ,004
total 50

Except for the 12th item (I wonder about how the daily life goes on in English-speaking
countries), all items have yielded a statistically significant difference between the two groups.
These findings show that native speakers pose a better model for the students in view of cultural
aspects. Also, intercultural motivation turns out to be a quite important factor for the positive
attitudes of the students towards language learning.

145
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Instructor-related Aspects:

Table -4. Statistical Analysis of Items Linked with Instructor-related Aspects

Sum of
Group N Mean Rank U Z P
Ranks
1 25 20,88 522
2 25 30,12 753 197 -2,42 ,016
total 50

Considering the findings as to the final part of the scale, the students gave more positive
responses in favor of NESTs. Factors like proficiency, motivation factor and intercultural
communication, etc. put NESTs in a more favorable and preferable position when compared with
Non-NESTs.
In the light of the above findings, it becomes obvious that except for two items (10 th and
th
12 ) eighteen items have yielded statistically significant results to the favor of NESTs. That is, the
context and findings of this study imply that NESTs have a far more positive influence on the
motivation of English language learners towards speaking lessons when compared with Non-
NESTs. These results put NESTs in a more favorable and advantageous position in the context of
motivation towards speaking courses; also for the whole language learning process.
As for the failure of 10th and 12th items, it is not surprising not to have a statistically
significant difference in terms of them. 10th item is related with language proficiency of the
students and it covers a compensation dimension. In other words, it is directly concerned with the
general tendencies of the students during interlocutions. That is, it is quite normal to observe that
the students belonging to the Non-NEST group think they can achieve compensation. The 12th item
is concerned with the learners’ curiosity about the daily life in English-speaking countries. It is not
perplexing to see that both groups wonder about the English daily life. It is cultural curiosity and
shared by the students of the two groups. Although these two items do not imply an inclination
towards a certain side, the overwhelming majority of the items specify the orientation of the
findings yielded by this study.
It is clear that native instructor has certain positive influences on the students’ attitudes
towards speaking course. The findings attest to such a comment that native speaker instructors can
constitute a good model for the students particularly for the speaking skill. The findings as to the
language proficiency part imply that gaining proficiency in speaking requires a certain period of
time. Native speaker instructor also appeared to be a good model for the cultural dimension in
speaking courses, which adds a plus for native instructors.
All these findings do not mean that non-native instructors are poor teachers. Because they
are also learners of English, they have numerous advantages like better anticipating language
difficulties, supplying more information about the target language and introducing learning
strategies more effectively, etc. As Medgyes (2001) points out, in an ideal school, there should be a
good balance of NESTs and non-NESTs that complement each other in their strengths and
weaknesses.
The primary aim should be to help students develop their speaking skills as much as
possible. Whether the teacher is NEST or Non-NEST, the most important thing is to develop an
adequate level of communicative and intercultural competence during the language learning
process. However, in line with the findings of this study, it can be said that NESTs can be

146
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

employed for speaking skill in language classes and they can be of considerable help for the
smooth and effective functioning of the learning process.

5. CONCLUSION AND SUGGESTIONS

This study, which was conducted in the School of Foreign Languages at Ondokuz Mayıs
University, aimed to find out the extent to which NESTs are effective on the attitudes of prep-class
students towards speaking lessons. 50 students were included in the study and while 25 students
took speaking lessons from a NEST, the other 25 students were taught by a Non-NEST. The
findings were shaped in a comparative way for each group. The overall finding of the study
suggests that NESTs are far more effective than Non-NESTs in view of the students’ attitudes
towards speaking lessons.
It is not true to make a generalization like “Natives teach English better than non-natives”.
Each group has its own advantages. The best way is to make use of these advantages of both
groups and try to minimize their shortcomings. It is not possible to say that NESTs are optimal and
perfect teachers and they pose an ideal model for language learners. They have some disadvantages
like being unfamiliar with the system and expectations of the students, etc. Likewise, Non-NESTs
have some disadvantages like having problems with fluency, command of the language, etc.
Briefly, it can be an effective way to hire NESTs for speaking lessons; however, if there is not such
an opportunity the advantages of Non-NESTs should be utilized at utmost level and an ever-
developing and flexible approach should be adopted while designing curricula and teaching
procedures.

147
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

REFERENCES

Arva, V., & Medgyes, P. (2000). Native and non-native teachers in the classroom. System, 28, 355
372.

Barrat, L., & Kontra, H. (2000). Native-English speaking teachers in cultures other than their own.
TESOL Journal, 3, 19-23.

Brown, Douglas H. (2007). Principles of Language Learning and Teaching. New York: Pearson
Longman.

Carter, Ronald and David Nunan (eds.) (2001). The Campbridge Guide to Teaching English to
Speakers of Other Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Donato R., &Adair-Hauck, B. (1992). Discourse Perspectives on Formal Instruction. Language

Awareness, 1, 74-89.

Gardner, R. C. (1985). Social Psychology and Second Language Learning. The Role of Attitudes
and Motivation. London: Edward Arnold.

İnceçay, G and D. Atay (2008). EFL Learners’ Interaction with Native and Non-Native EFL
Teachers. http://www.eab.org.tr/eab/oc/egtconf/pdfkitap/pdf/15.pdf

Kumaravadivelu, B. (2006). Understanding Language Teaching: From Method to Postmethod.

London: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

Lasagabaster, D. & Sierra, J. M. (2002). University students’ perceptions of native and non-native
speaker teachers of English. Language Awareness, 11,2, 132-140.

Procter, Paul (ed.) (1978). Longman Dictionary of Contemporary English, Longman.

Medgyes, Peter (2001). “When the Teacher is a Non-native Speaker”. In M. Celce-Murcia (Ed.),
Teaching English as a second or foreign language. New York: Newbury House, p. 429
442.

Norton, B. (1997). Language, identity, and the ownership of English. TESOL Quarterly, 31 (3),
409- 427.

Rivers, Wilga M. (1981). Teaching Foreign Language Skills. London: The University of Chicago
Press.

Widdowson, H. G. 1994. ‘The ownership of English’. TESOL Quarterly. 28/2: 377–88.

Wong-Fillmore, L. (1989). Language Learning in Social Context: The View from Research in
Second Language Learning. In R. Dietrich &C.F. Graumann (eds), Language Processing in
Social Context. Amsterdam: Elsevier.

148
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

APPENDIX
Attitude Scale for Speaking Course

Please rate how strongly you agree or disagree with each of the following statements by placing a
check mark in the appropriate box.

Strongly agree: 1 Agree: 2 Neither agree nor disagree: 3 Disagree: 4

Strongly disagree: 5

1 2 3 4 5
COURSE-RELATED ASPECTS

1 It is a great pleasure for me to attend speaking courses.

2 I don’t think it would be better if the lesson hours for the

speaking course were higher.
3 I have a strong motivation for participating in the activities held
during the speaking lessons.
4 But for the speaking lessons, my speaking performance would
go worse to a notable extent.
5 Speaking lessons constitute a motivating factor for me in terms
of foreign language learning.
LANGUAGE PROFICIENCY

6 I have self-confidence while expressing myself in English.

7 I can understand the lyrics of the English songs.

8 I feel competent enough to understand the dialogues in English

movies without making use of subtitles.

9 I have self-sufficiency to participate in the speaking activities

both inside and outside the class.
10 When my language knowledge falls short I can always find a
way to get my message across.

CULTURAL ASPECTS
11 I would like to make native speaker friends.

149
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

12 I wonder about how the daily life goes on in English-speaking

countries.

13 Learning English is something like getting in tune with the

cultures of English-speaking countries.

14 Attending speaking lessons helps me see the similarities and

differences of distinct cultures and therefore lets me gain an
intercultural insight.

15 I try to notice and focus on cultural elements in other lessons

with the help of awareness I have gained in speaking lessons.

INSTRUCTOR-RELATED ASPECTS
16 The instructor is really good at classroom management.

17 The instructor’s command of the language is adequate.

18 The instructor poses a model for me to develop my oral skills.

19 Communicating with the instructor lowers my speaking anxiety

to a considerable extent.
20 The instructor usually finds culturally-interesting topics to help
us take part in the speaking activities.

150
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”
November 15-17, 2012 SAMSUN

CLINICAL SUPERVISION: A VIABLE OPTION FOR LANGUAGE TEACHER

DEVELOPMENT

M. Naci KAYAOGLU*, M. Kerem KOBUL**

ABSTRACT

This article examines Clinical Supervision as a viable option for the professional development of
language teachers. First, it states the urging need for teacher supervision on the premise that the teacher
remains the key figure primarily affecting the outcomes of the language classroom. The study critically
discusses the history and current implementation of teacher supervision practice in Turkey. Secondly, a brief
overview of supervision, in general, is presented, indicating the potential benefits for staff development. The
last part highlights the need for further research on Clinical Supervision for ongoing professional
development of English language teachers.

Key words: Clinical supervision, supervision, teacher education, teacher development, professional
development

1. INTRODUCTION
Although the technological and computing age has brought about enormous alterations in
the means, if not the methods, used in the language classrooms within the last few decades, the
teacher, quite deservedly, still remains the key figure primarily affecting what is happening in the
language classroom. To put it differently, the success or failure of a language class is mainly in the
hands of the language teacher in that the methods, techniques, the materials, the language that the
teacher employs, even his kinesics, are all contributing factors to this perplexing process. Thus,
equipping the language teacher with the necessary linguistic, methodological, and background
knowledge is one of the ways to improve the language teacher’s qualifications. As this is the case,
many faculties employ various courses in their curricula which “tend to present teachers with a
quantifiable amount of knowledge, usually in the form of general theories and methods that are
characterized as being applicable to any language learning or teaching context” (Johnson, 1997, p.
780) to improve the prospective language teachers’ professional qualities. However, the
professional development of language teachers sometimes end or stay limited with the courses they
take during their undergraduate studies. Moreover, it is the case that teachers seem to have a
tendency to adopt, if not totally accept, the way they were taught in school. As Van Den Branden
(2009) points out: “Teachers teach in the way they themselves were taught, and show strong
resistance toward radically modifying the teaching behavior that they are so familiar with” (p. 666).
They seem to be as if they were compelled to adopt, the way they were taught. During their
professional years language teachers may try to learn new content; however, they usually may not
try to improve the way they teach; the methods and techniques they use in the classroom. They are,
sometimes, even not aware of the fact that their methods, techniques and applications may need to

*
Asst. Prof. Dr. M. Naci KAYAOGLU, Karadeniz Technical University Faculty of Letters, Trabzon, Turkey,
[email protected]
**
Lec. M. Kerem KOBUL, Karadeniz Technical University Faculty of Letters, Trabzon, Turkey, [email protected]

151
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

be adjusted and/ or renewed at all. For instance, in a study conducted by Menon and Alamelu
(2011) in a college in Chennai the researchers were faced with the attitudinal problems of the
teacher that they had a wrong presumption that everything they did was right and they were found
not willing for a co-operation for professional development. Furthermore, sometimes even the most
experienced teachers may confront with various problems due to either newly emerged methods
and techniques or materials as well as classroom management issues. Hence, no matter how
experienced the teacher is, most language classrooms, sometimes, may not end up with the
expected results due to, mostly, the wrong choices or practices of the teacher. Menon and Alamelu
(2011) point out: “It has been observed that many a time it is the teachers themselves who
contribute the maximum to derail the teaching learning process. This could be due to various
factors: the hostile attitude, insufficient knowledge, lack of commitment, sheer indifference, faulty
methodology, improper classroom management and so on” (p. 79). Even with the best intentions
the teacher may be implementing something(s) incorrect due to mostly their own perceptions of a
good classroom or teaching. Van Den Branden (2009) also draws attention to the fact: “Teachers,
for instance, who attached great importance to tightly controlling what was going on in the
classroom, often felt uncomfortable with the high degree of learner autonomy and learner initiative
that the task-based syllabus aimed for” (p. 666). Thus, due to such probable, though, unintended,
problematic situations a need to supervise the teacher’s practice in the actual classroom for a better
teaching-learning arises (Bailey, 2006; Van Den Branden, 2009).
The present article serves as a theoretical commentary on the issue of clinical supervision
and it aims to draw an overall in-depth picture of clinical supervision and the current application of
supervision in Turkey context, where traditional one-session supervisions are regarded and
implemented as the mere means of professional development. To that end, first the article provides
the readers with the operational definition of supervision and how it has been applied in Turkey.
Later, clinical supervision is suggested as a viable solution to compensate for the gaps in English
language teachers’ professional development in Turkey context. Finally, the paper ends with the
discussion of some practical implications and recommendations that could serve well at
administration level.

1.1. Supervision

Supervision is a loan term from industrial field (Bailey, 2006; Kilcullen, 2007, Lynch,
Hancox, & Happel, 2011; Waite, 1995) which was, presumably, used to evaluate or assess the
workers’ working in the production lines of factories. Supervision as a profession has experienced
drastic revolutions since its very early implementations in industry as well as in classrooms.
Supervision in education, similar, if not alike, to industrial supervision mainly aims to improve the
quality of education by improving the teacher’s overall professional skills, thence, improvement of
student learning as the ultimate aim.
In its general sense, supervision deals with administrative issues such as curriculum,
syllabus, and the management of the structure of education including the financial documents.
Daresh (2001) points out “no real consensus has ever been reached concerning what supervision
should be” (as cited in Bailey, 2006, p. 6). In general supervision there is a superficial eye on the
pedagogical aspect of the education system, at least in terms of what actually happens in the
classroom. Although the ultimate aim of supervision is to improve teaching and learning, the
practice itself sometimes may not conform to what is intended and the outcomes of the practice
might not end with the expected or intended results. On the other hand, it is obvious that
supervision has been a disturbing, if not totally irritating, situation for many language teachers
(Gebhard, 1990; Kayaoglu, 2012; Koklu & Kunduz, 2011; Memduhoglu et al., 2007; Murdoch,
2000; Nunan & Lamb, 1996; Oprandy, 1999) due to the way it is implemented, its de facto
“inspection” nature. Some (Bailey, 2006; Kayaoglu, 2007, 2012; Memduhoglu, 2012) argue that
the process of supervision per se is enough to cause discomfort and distress. Kayaoglu (2007)

152
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

points out: “even the mere mention of the term supervision is enough to evoke unpleasant feelings
mixed with indignation at the disturbing condition” (p.15). The supervision process has become a
trepidatious experience for most teachers in that it sometimes distorts the natural practice of the
language teachers. Thus, in actual supervision practices or sessions some teachers tend to adjust, if
not totally change, their immediate teaching subject trying to guess what the supervisor would like
to see just because the supervisor will be evaluating, or judging, the teacher’s practice. Oprandy
(1999) points out: “I cannot count the number of times I have seen teachers arrange to do lessons
on comparatives and/or superlatives, on giving directions, or on the present continuous tense” (p.
102). This is mostly due to the hierarchical stance of the traditional supervisor who is mainly
authoritative, prescriptive, over-critical, judgemental (Gebhard, 1990; Kennedy, 1993) as well as
the possible future institutional reward; certification or punishment; ending employment results of
the supervision process (Kayaoglu, 2007; Kayikci, 2005; Kayaoglu, 2012; Memduhoglu, 2012).
Kennedy (1993) narrates a traditional supervisor in a routine supervision process: “he or she checks
briefly with the trainees before the lesson, observes, and then after the lesson talks to the trainees
about what has been seen. The overtones are prescriptive, and the ways in which these supervisions
are carried out can be variously helpful, ineffective, or positively damaging” (p. 162). Moreover,
even the post conferences which are held after the classroom observation can be a daunting task for
the teachers as Kayaoglu (2007) points out: “The teachers hesitate to speak their mind freely during
the supervisory process for fear that they can be rated low or they can receive a stern rebuke” (p.
16). Thus, in most situations, not surprisingly, supervision plays a hindering role rather than
motivating and improving the education.

1.2. Supervision in Turkey

The situation is not much different in Turkey (Bilir, 1991; Kayikci, 2005; Kayaoglu, 2012;
Koklu & Kunduz, 2011; Memduhoglu, 2012; Memduhoglu et al., 2007). In Turkey, the ministry of
education, as its responsibilities amenable to the constitution, holds some organizations and
activities for teacher development from conferences to workshops and seminars. However, due to
its huge staff population and vast geographical area of responsibility amounts to 936,254 teachers
(MoNE, 2013), teacher development can majorly be held through supervision system in which
there are supervisors appointed for particular districts of big cities. These supervisors, most of
whom are elementary school teachers rather than English language teachers, are responsible for
supervising the teachers in their region. The system works on the basis of the evaluation of the
teacher by the supervisor in which the teacher has almost no say during the process. However, in
this process, for the teachers to be considered as successful, thus rewarded, they have to get over
ninety out of one hundred points for successive five years out of the supervision process. The
system in Turkey seems to have a deterring rather than facilitative role, like some other contexts in
the world (Bailey, 2006; Bilir, 1991; Gaies & Bowers, 1993; Kayikci, 2005; Kayaoglu, 2012;
Memduhoglu, 2012; Memduhoglu et al. 2007). Moreover, Memduhoglu (2012) takes the
discussion further and remarks: “In Turkey, education supervision has long been applied with an
understanding of control mechanism of educational activities. Research has shown that the
supervision sub-system in Turkey cannot contemporarily function, it fails to meet sector needs and
there are many issues in this field” (p. 150). Although far too little attention has been paid
particularly to the supervision process of English language teachers (Kayaoglu, 2012; Paker, 1995),
it is evident from a body of literature that the supervision system, in general, seems to constitute a
debilitating role in Turkey. Furthermore, Kayaoglu’s study (2012) may serve as a base for future
studies and makes a noteworthy contribution to the limited body of English language teacher
supervision literature by shedding light on the supervision process of particularly English language
teachers working for MoNE in Turkey.

153
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

1.3. A viable solution: Clinical Supervision

However, the last few decades have witnessed a dramatic shift in the role and stance of the
supervisor from an expert or evaluator to a facilitator who has the responsibility of creating “an
environment that cultivates reflection, exploration, and change” (Chamberlin, 2000, p. 656). The
supervisors have taken their “inspector” jacket off and try to improve the teacher’s teaching-
learning situation by trying to maximize their performance rather than leaving them defenseless in
front of the supervisor. The supervisor’s role has reached to a level of psychological consultant
who reflects their clients’ lives like a mirror which allows the supervisees to re-examine their
practice in light of their decisions, concerns, experiences, and knowledge (Wallace, 1991) rather
than having an evaluative or judgemental tone. In a time when such democratic and collaborative
approaches to educational supervision have reached a peak, Cogan (1973) was the first to coin the
process as Clinical Supervision after which some other names have also been suggested:
Alternative Supervision (Freeman, 1982), Collaborative Supervision (Gebhard, 1984).
Furthermore, as Kayaoglu (2012) points out: “In response to the adversarial attitudes towards
supervision, the clinical supervision has gained recognition in many educational settings” (p. 103)
the past thirty years have seen an increasing interest in Clinical Supervision, which can be
suggested as a viable option for also Turkey context.
Clinical supervision, in its core, is a process “by which teaching performance is
systematically observed, analyzed, and evaluated” (Gaies & Bowers, 1993, p. 167). Moreover, it is
a cyclical process which is conducted in regular intervals rather than a one-time prejudiced or
prescriptive classroom observation by the supervisor which is conducted only once or twice a year.
Hence, its cyclical nature makes clinical supervision a quite appropriate solution for Turkey context
where teachers are supervised once in a year or two years. Memduhoglu et al. (2007) have also
suggested a similar process for Turkish context although they haven’t named it as Clinical
Supervision:
Because assessment in educational supervision in Turkey is of the summative model
type, the contributions of assessments to teachers’ improvement are limited. Carried
out twice a year, supervisions of primary school teachers hinder teachers’ improvement,
by assessing them at regular intervals over the course of the process. However, sound
formative assessments on a regular basis are obligatory for a good summative assessment.
(p. 65)

Thus, clinical supervision with its cyclical observation and conference processes may constitute an
ameliorating choice for the supervision system in Turkey.
Moreover, various similar taxonomies and cycles, which are similar in nature, have been
offered (Abbot & Carter, 1995; Bowers, 1987; Goldhammer, 1980) in additition to Cogan’s (1973)
eight-phase clinical supervision cycle. However, Richards & Schmidt (2010) present a concise
cycle:
a- a planning conference, in which the teacher discusses his or her goals, methodology,
problems, etc., with the supervisor and they decide on what the supervisor should observe
and what kind of information about the lesson he or she should collect
b- classroom observation, in which the supervisor observes the teacher in his or her
classroom
c- feedback conference, in which the teacher and the supervisor review the data the
supervisor has collected, discuss the effectiveness of the lesson, and decide on strategies
for improvement, if necessary. (p. 83)

Supervision is no more a one-way imposing process in which the supervisors prescribes the
best way to the supervisee in feedback conferences. Even the data on which feedback conference is

154
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

based, unlike traditional supervision, no more consists of the mere perceptions and memory of the
supervisor of what a good lesson is and what s/he thought to have happened in the classroom but
depends on the systematic and objective data obtained from various digital or analog media. With
the current relatively easier data collection media available, the teacher is no longer a defenseless
and suppressed supervisee. For instance, the ubiquitous personal digital cameras which allow long-
time digital video recording or digital voice-recorders provide concrete and valid data for feedback
conference rather than the weak impressions of the supervisor after a tiring day. As Wallace (1979)
puts it, video provides “a means of objectifying the teaching process and converting what is
subjective and ephemeral into something that is experienced in common and capable of analysis”
(p. 13). Hence, it provides an opportunity for the supervisee to have a say on what is observed.
Furthermore, some other analog data collection procedures such selective verbatim recording,
seating chart observation records and wide-lens technique (Bailey, 2006; Stoller, 1996) can be
exploited in Clinical Supervision of English language teachers in Turkey.
In spite of all the benefits and opportunities that clinical supervision provides, the most
important limitation of it lies in the fact that it may not be appropriate to implement in all cultures.
For instance, in eastern or middle-eastern cultures where people are used to authoritative behavior
and where teacher is considered as the main and mere source of information in the class, people
may not welcome or misinterpret such a democratic and egalitarian attitude. Gebhard (1984)
mentions a supervisor from a middle-eastern country reporting “if, as a supervisor, he attempted to
get teachers to share ideas with him, the teachers would think that he was not a very good
supervisor” (p. 506). In some places of Turkey, asking the opinions of the supervisee, who is
mainly used to directive and prescriptive manner, may not be that appealing to the supervisee.

2. CONCLUSION

It is every teacher’s desire to be a good and better teacher; however, not all of them may
always have the opportunity to improve themselves professionally. Despite the fact that current
supervision in Turkey does not have a facilitative and improving effect (Bilir, 1991; Kayaoglu,
2012; Memduhoglu, 2012; Memduhoglu et al. 2007), supervision can be exploited better to
improve English language teachers’ professional development, especially of those who cannot
reach other sources of professional development such as seminars, workshops, journals etc. to
improve themselves, by just shifting the way it is implemented. Moreover, it is, not surprisingly,
evident from research that language teachers have a positive attitude towards clinical supervision
compared to traditional supervision (Koklu & Kunduz, 2012). Thus, an implication of this study is
that Clinical Supervision can be suggested as a versatile option for language teachers’ professional
development in Turkey. Last but not least, further research is strongly recommended to help us
establish a greater degree of understanding of the role of clinical supervision in professional
development of English language teachers in Turkey. These research-based attempts are believed
to raise awareness at administration level as well as to encourage practitioners to adopt a
democratic and collaborative attitude towards ongoing teacher development practice.

155
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

REFERENCES

Abbott, S. & Carter, R. M. (1985). Clinical supervision and the foreign language teacher. Foreign
Language Annals, 18(1), 25–29.

Acheson, K. A. & Gall, . M. D. (1997). Techniques in the clinical supervision of teachers:

Preservice and inservice applications (4th ed.). New York: Longman.

Bailey, K. (2006). Language teacher supervision: A case-based approach. Cambridge: Cambridge

University Press.

Bailey, K. (2009). Issues in Language Teacher Evaluation. In Long, M. H. & Doughty, C.J. (Eds).
The handbook of language teaching (pp. 706-725). Sussex: Wiley- Blackwell.

Bilir, M. (1991). Türk egitim sisteminde teftiş alt sisteminin yapı ve işleyişi. Unpublished Doctoral
Dissertation [The supervision sub-system in Turkish educational system: structure and
operation]. Unpublished Ph.D thesis, Ankara University.

Bilir, M. (1992). Teftiş sisteminin yapı ve işleyişi. Ankara Üniversitesi Egitim Bilimleri Fakültesi
Dergisi, 25(1), 251-284.

Chamberlin, C. R. (2000). TESL degree candidates’ perceptions of trust in supervisors. TESOL

Quarterly, 34(4), 653–672.

Cogan, M. L. (1973). Clinical Supervision. Boston: Houghton Mifflin.

Daresh, J. C. (2001). Supervision as proactive leadership, 3rd ed. Prospect Heights, IL:Waveland
Press.

Ellis, R. (1990). Activities and procedures for teacher preparation. In Jack C. Richards and David
Nunan (eds.). Second language teacher education (pp. 26-36). New York: Cambridge
University Press.

Flanders, N. A. (1976). Interaction analysis and clinical supervision. Journal of Research and
Development in Education, 9(2), 7-56.

Freeman, D. (1989). Teacher training, development and decision making: A model ofteaching and
related strategies for language teacher education. TESOL Quarterly, 23(1), 27–45.

Freeman, D. (1982). Observing teachers: three approaches to in-service training and development.
TESOL Quarterly, 16(1), 21-29.

Gaies, S. & Bowers, R. (1993). Clinical supervision of language teaching: The supervisor astrainer
and educator. In J. C. Richards & D. Nunan (eds.), Second language teachereducation (3rd
ed.) (pp. 167–181). New York: Cambridge University Press.

Gaies, S. & Bowers, R. (2010). Clinical Supervision of Language Teaching: the supervisor as
trainer and educator. In Gnawali, L. (ed), A course pack on teacher development in ELT.
Kathmandu: KU.

Gebhard, J. C. (1990). Models of supervision: Choices. In Second Language Teacher Education

(ed.) Richards, J.C. and D. Nunan. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

156
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Gebhard, J. G. (1984). Models of supervision: Choices. TESOL Quarterly, 18 (3), 501-514

Goldhammer, R. (1969). Clinical supervision: Special methods for the supervision of teachers.
New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.

Goldhammer, R., Anderson, R.H. & Krajewski, R.J. (1980) Clinical supervision: Special methods
for the supervision of teachers. New York, Holt, Rinehart and Winston.

Hoy, W. K. & Woolfolk, A. E (1989). Supervising student teachers. In Anita E.Woolfolk (ed.),
Research perspectives on the graduate preparation of teachers (pp. 108-131). Englewood
Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.

Johson, K. E. (2009). Second language teacher education: A soicocultural perspective. NY:

Routledge.

Kayaoglu, M. N. (2012). Dictating or facilitating: The supervisory process for language teachers.,
Australian Journal of Teacher Education, 37(10), 103-117.

Kayaoglu, M. N. (2007). The unbearable lightness of being supervised for ELT teachers. TTED
Newsletter: Teacher Trainers and Educators, 1, 15-20.

Kayikci, K. (2005). MEB denetmenlerinin teftiş alt sisteminin yapısal sorunlarına ilişkin algıları
veiş doyum düzeyleri [Perceptions of ministerial supervisors about structural problems in
the supervision sub-system and job-satisfaction]. Kuram ve Uygulamada Egitim Yönetimi,
44,507-527

Kennedy, J. (1993). Meeting the needs of the teacher trainees on teaching practice. ELT Journal,
47(2), 157–65.

Kilcullen, N. (2007). An analysis of the experiences of clinical supervision on Registered Nurses

undertaking MSc/graduate diploma in renal and urological nursing and on their clinical
supervisors. Journal of Clinical Nursing, 16, 1029–1038.

Koklu, M. & Kunduz, E. (2011). The perceptions of teachers’ about the behaviours of elementary
school supervisors on contemporary educational supervision principles and clinical
supervision. E-Journal of New World Sciences Academy, 6(1), 621-631.

Lynch, L., Hancox, K. & Happell, B. (2011). The state of the science of clinical supervision in
Australia and New Zealand. In J. Cutcliffe, K. Hyrkas & J. Fowler (eds), Routledge
Handbook of Clinical Supervision: Fundamental international themes (pp. 163-174).
Abingdon, Oxon: Routledge.

McFaul, S.A., & Cooper, J.M. (1984). Peer clinical supervision: Theory vs. reality. Educational
Leadership, 40, 4–11.

Memduhoglu, H. B. (2012). The issue of education supervision in Turkey in the views of teachers,
administrators, supervisors and lecturers. Educational Sciences: Theory & Practice, 12(1),
149-156.

157
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Memduhoglu, H. B., Aydın, I, Yılmaz, K, Güngör, S., & Oguz, E. (2007). The process of
supervision in the Turkish educational system: Purpose, structure, operation. Asian Pacific
Education Review, 8(1), 56-70.

Menon, U & Alamelu, C. (2011). Role of reflective teaching in the evolution of an

effective teacher. Modern Journal of Applied Linguistics, 3(2), 78-85.

Miles, M.B. & Hubbermann, A.M. (1994). Qualitative data analysis (2nd ed). Sage, London.

MoNE (Ministry of National Education). (2013). 2011-2012 Statistical Data. [retrieved Jan, 8,
2013 from http://sgb.meb.gov.tr/meb_iys_dosyalar/2012_12/06021046_meb_istatistikleri
_orgun_egitim_2011_2012.pdf

Murdoch, G. (2000). Introducing a teacher-supportive evaluation system. English Language

Teaching Journal, 54(1), 54-64

Nunan, D. (1993). Action research in the language classroom. In J. C. Richards & D. Nunan (eds.),
Second language teachereducation (3rd ed.) (pp. 62–81). New York: Cambridge University
Press.

Nunan, D. & Lamb, C. (1996). The self-directed teacher: Managing the learning process.
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Oprandy, R. (1999). Exploring with a supervisor. In Jerry G. Gebhard and Robert Oprandy (eds.),
Language teaching awareness: A guide to exploring beliefs and practices (pp. 99-121).
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Paker, T. (1995). Clinical supervision as in-service teacher development. Çukurova Üniversitesi

Egitim Fakültesi Dergisi, 1(11), 39-53.

Richards, J. C., & Schmidt, R. (2010). Longman dictionary of language teaching and applied
linguistics (4th ed.). London: Longman (Pearson Education).

Richards, J. C., & Nunan, D. (Eds). (1990). Preface. Second language teacher education 3rd Ed.
(pp. xi-xii). New York: Cambridge University Press.

Sergiovanni, T. J. and Starrett, R. L. (1979). Supervision: Human perspectives. 2nd Ed. NewYork.
McGraw-Hill.

Sergiovanni, T. J. & Starret, R. L. (1977). Reforming teacher evaluation: naturalistic alternative.

Educational Leadership. 34(8), 602-607.

Stoller, F. L. (1996). Teacher supervision: Moving towards an interactive approach. English

Teacher Forum, 34, 2–9.

Vacilotto, S., & Cummings, R. (2007). Peer Coaching in TEFL/TESL Programmes. ELT Journal,
61(2), 153-160.

Van den Branden, K. (2009) Diffusion and Implementation of Innovations. In Long, M. H.

& Doughty, C.J. (Eds). The handbook of language teaching (pp. 659-672). Sussex:
Wiley-Blackwell

158
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Waite, D. (1995). Rethinking instructional supervision: Notes on language and culture. London:
Falmer Press, Taylor & Francis Inc.

Wallace, M. J. (1979). Microteaching and the teaching of English as a second or foreign language
in teacher training institutions. Edinburgh: Scottish Centre of Education Overseas.

159
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”
November 15-17, 2012 SAMSUN

GOT POETRY? A “BEST-PRACTICES” POETRY LESSON

Marna BROEKHOFF1

ABSTRACT

Traditional drill-and-practice language lessons overemphasize accuracy, but communicative

approaches overemphasize fluency. Activity-based learning creates a compromise. Using a dramatic poem
for elementary pupils, this article analyzes eight “best practices” language teaching techniques and guides
participants in creating their own mini-lesson.

Keywords: “Best practices,” communicative, integrated skills, structural grammar, educational objectives

1. INTRODUCTION

Although the structured drill-and-practice method of language teaching has long been out
of favor in the U.S., it is still the norm in Turkey and in other countries with traditional
communities and traditional curricula. Teachers may recognize the de-motivating and rigid aspects
of this approach, but they don’t see alternatives. On the other hand, the more recent pendulum-
swing of communicative language teaching, originating the U.S., is now faulted for promoting
fluency at the expense of accuracy.

More balanced “best-practices” curricula emphasize activity-based language lessons that

include the following principles (Brown, 2007; Opp-Beckman & Klinghammer, 2006): 1) authentic
or “real” materials from the target culture, rather than special materials created for language
learners; 2) a variety of group processes; 3) a combination of communicative and structural
strategies; 4) multiple learning modalities (visual, auditory, kinesthetic); 5) contextualized lesson
points; 6) integrated skills (and sub-skills); 7) multiple means of assessment; and 8)—fun!

The model lesson plan described below, illustrating all of the above principles, can be used
for teaching nearly any authentic language material. Poetry is chosen here because it is short and
usually has song-like rhymes and rhythms that most learners enjoy. The dramatic poem selected for
this discussion is “Today I Had a Rotten Day” from a collection of poetry for children, Revenge of
the Lunch Ladies, by Kenn Nesbitt (2007).
Today I had a rotten day.
As I was coming in from play
I accidentally stubbed my toes
and tripped and fell and whacked my nose. 4
I chipped a tooth. I cut my lip.
I scraped my knee. I hurt my hip.
I pulled my shoulder, tweaked my ear,
and got a bruise upon my rear. 8


Assistant Professor, Melikşah University, [email protected]

160
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

I banged my elbow, barked my shin.

A welt is forming on my chin.
My pencil poked me in the thigh.
I got an eyelash in my eye. 12
I sprained my back. I wrenched my neck.
I'm feeling like a total wreck.
So that's the last time I refuse
when teacher says to tie my shoes. 16

2. COOPERATIVE LEARNING

All the activities are done in Cooperative Learning groups of four, with assigned roles of
Speaker, Recorder, Encourager, and Timekeeper, the purpose being to motivate (or coerce) each
group member to participate. Kagan’s (1994) seminal work in this area has been widely accepted
for the past 25 years. Each group must complete a simple task within a specified time period,
usually less than ten minutes. Cards in a different color for each role (red for Speaker, green for
Encourager, etc.), explaining the various duties can be given to each group. Sample comments on a
card that each role player could make will facilitate the group interaction. For example, comments
on the Encourager’s card could include, “That’s interesting….” “Ayşe, what do you think?” or
“Who has a different opinion?” Alternatively, the four colored cards can be used for a variation of
“Numbered Heads Together,” in which the person holding the blue card in each group answers one
question or does one activity, while each yellow-card holder answers the next, and so forth.

3. THREE INSTRUCTIONAL PHASES

The first step in the lesson plan deals with comprehension and contextual vocabulary. It
illustrates both communicative teaching strategies, as well as multiple learning modalities. First the
poem is read aloud by either the teacher or a volunteer, or better yet, by one of the excellent online
recordings by children themselves (Nesbitt, 2005). Then each group discusses and paraphrases each
stanza, debriefing any difficult words that they underlined while listening. A volunteer “body”
comes to the front of the room, and others apply post-its to the body parts mentioned in the poem.
Volunteers act out each line of the poem as it is read again. This dramatic way of teaching
vocabulary is well suited to “Rotten Day” and will appeal to all learners, but especially those who
favor auditory and kinesthetic learning styles more than visual (Hutinger, 2001). For holistic
appreciation, the class can read the complete poem in unison.

The second step in the lesson plan is primarily structural, focusing on a grammar point in
the poem itself, in this case, simple past tense. Meaning, form, and structured practice are provided.
All instruction in this phase is contextualized; that is, the activities all relate back to the poem. The
teacher can ask when all the bad things happened and draw a timeline. Pupils are directed to notice
all the similarities for simple past tense suffixes and derive a formation rule for regular verbs. Thus
their learning here is inductive and self-guided, which is more effective than deductive
memorization of rules given by the teacher.

Structured practice is provided in the cloze paragraph and verb worksheet shown in below.
Extensions of the cloze exercise could involve deleted letters, for vocabulary practice; the words of
the poem printed without spaces between them, to teach word boundaries; or a sentence scramble
with the lines of the poem mixed together to teach comprehension at the syntax level.

161
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Cloze Exercise and Verb Tense Chart for “Today I Had a Rotten Day”

I. Please fill in the blanks with an appropriate verb in the simple past tense.

Today I had a rotten day

As I was coming in from play.
I accidentally _ _ _ _ _ _ _my toes
And tripped and fell and ____________my nose.
I _ _ _ _ _ _ _ a tooth. I cut my lip.
I scraped my knee. I hurt my hip.
I ____________my shoulder, __________my ear.
And got a bruise upon my rear

II. Write down the simple past tense for these verbs:

Work:
Fill:
Erase:
Jump:
Hop:
Hope:
Describe:

For more advanced groups, the present or past progressive tenses could be included here
since there are several examples in the poem. Advanced groups could be given a chart of verb tense
meanings and formations, as in Figure 1. An additional grammar point using the same procedure of
meaning, form, and structured practice could involve the use of dependent adverbial clauses in
discussing why, when, or how the boy had such a bad day. Sample sentences might be, “The boy
whacked his nose because….” Or “When did the boy’s troubles begin?”

Figure 1: Sample of Azar’s Verb Timelines

(Azar, B. (2003). Fundamentals of English Grammar. New York: Pearson/Longman, p. 39)

162
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

The third step in the lesson plan is the application of the content and grammar structure to
group writing activities about a bad day. Each group can select a particular slant for writing about a
bad day, in the form of a simple poem, story, or letter to the boy. Each pupil can dictate a sentence
of two for the group activity. Only the Recorder writes (thus encouraging group interaction), and
then the Speaker can read the group writing to the whole class, or each group member can act out a
role. Use of the target grammar structure (such as regular past tense formation) needs to be
included. The writings can include pictures and be displayed on a bulletin board. These wrap-up
activities all require integrated skills (reading, writing, speaking, and listening, as well as grammar
sub-skills). The writing project is primarily communicative, requiring negotiation among group
members.

4. ASSESSMENT

Assessment activities can be as varied as the lesson itself. It should probably be formative,
rather than summative, given the nature of the lesson. The cloze paragraph, for example, can be
quickly and objectively checked. The final wrap-up writing assignment may be best assessed
through a simple rubric, explained to pupils in advance. If the writing criteria involve only
grammar, the same rubric could be used for all choices of poem, story, or letter. If the writing
assignment is expository, then paragraph structure could also be included in the rubric. Oral skills
can also be judged with a simple rubric or just by whether or not communication occurs.
Evaluating the group processes in this lesson is more subjective but nevertheless worthwhile.
Pupils themselves can be asked to comment on how well their group functioned and how the
interaction could be improved, thus approaching their learning from a meta-cognitive perspective.

It should also be noted that using the grammar and content of the poem in creating a new
communication, whether poem, story, letter, or skit, is at the higher levels of Bloom’s Taxonomy of
Educational Objectives, including Application, Analysis, and Synthesis (Bloom, 1956). This lesson
is at the opposite end of the spectrum from rote drills that characterize so many language lessons.
Lastly, some attention should be given to Bloom’s Affective Domain (Krathwohl, Bloom & Masia,
1973). Did the pupils enjoy the lesson? Assessment here can only be subjective and imprecise, but
indicators might be requests to work with similar poems, or to do more dramatic activities, and so
forth.

5. CONCLUSION AND SUGGESTIONS

This simple lesson plan thus includes all major principles of “best-practices” language
teaching, including the following: authentic materials; cooperative learning and other group
processes; a combination of teaching strategies that promote both fluency and accuracy; a variety
of learning modalities; contextualized instruction; integrated speaking, listening, reading, and
writing skills; affective as well as cognitive assessment involving critical thinking—and enjoyment.

The instructional plan outlined here is adaptable to nearly any language content, literary or
otherwise. It works very well for children’s poetry, particularly narrative poetry with vivid plots
and song-like qualities. I recently used a similar approach with university students for acting out
and then analyzing the syntax in heroic couplets from Alexander Pope’s “The Rape of the Lock,”
followed by requiring students to write their own couplets. The basic comprehension--guided
practice--application format can also work just as well with expository reading and writing at
nearly any level. For the first phase of the lesson, teachers can “zoom out” to activate students’
background knowledge of a subject in a “top-down” approach, and then “zoom in” to analyze key
words or grammatical structures in a “bottom-up” approach. Lastly, they can ask students to
generate their own writing on the same subject, using the same rhetorical or grammatical structures.

163
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

The greatest virtue of “best-practices” language teaching for both poetry and prose is that
it focuses on meaningful activities and multiple skills rather than on “maximum coverage” of
content, as in many traditional classrooms. It also promotes both fluency and accuracy, not just one
or the other.

164
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

REFERENCES

Azar, B. (2003). Fundamentals of English grammar (3rd ed.). New York:

Pearson/Longman.

Bloom, B. (1956). Taxonomy of educational objectives. Handbook I: Cognitive

domain. New York: David McKay.

Krathwohl, D. R., Bloom, B. S., & Masia, B. B. (1973). Taxonomy of

educational objectives. Handbook II: Affective domain. New York: David McKay.

Brown, H.D. (2007). Teaching by principles. New York: Pearson/Longman.

Hutinger, P. (2001, Nov.). Learning modalities: Pathways to effective learning. PBS

Teachers [online]. Available from
<http://www.pbs.org/teachers/earlychildhood/articles/learningmodalities.html>
[13 Nov. 2012].

Kagan, S. (1994). Cooperative Learning. San Clemente, CA: Kagan Publishing.

Nesbitt, Kenn (2005). Poetry4kids.com [Website]. Available from

http://www.poetry4kids.com/ [15 Jan. 2013].

Nesbitt, Kenn. (2007). Revenge of the Lunch Ladies. Minnetonka, MN: Meadowbrook.

Opp-Beckman, L. & Klinghammer, S.J. (2006). Shaping the way we teach English:
Successful practices around the world. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Department of State.

165
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”
November 15-17, 2012 SAMSUN

THE LANGUAGE USED IN TURKISH AND ENGLISH VERSIONS OF TOURISM

BROCHURES

Nalan KIZILTAN

ABSRACT

This study discusses the differences between the Turkish and English tourism brochures from
linguistic point of view. It has been seen that the brochures as tourist-information texts require a language of
tourism with some specialized vocabulary, and grammatical rules in an appropriately given discourse of two
cultures, Turkish and English. Corpus studies should be conducted to help the development of tourism sector.

Key Words: tourism brochures, translation, language in tourism brochures

1.0 INTRODUCTION

Tourism is a travel for predominantly recreational or leisure purposes or the provision of services
to support this leisure travel. Tourists travel for recreational purposes. The only considered tourist
aim is a general pursuit of happiness. Tourism brochures help tourists all around the world to visit
places for leisure, business and other purposes.

1.01 The Importance of Language

• Language, in that sense, is a medium to attract people to those places to be visited

implicitly and the language of tourism is, therefore, a specialized language. Francesconi
(2010, 20) supports this idea, pointing out that the language of tourism is “a set of words or
phrases showing a high degree of frequency and specificity in the context of tourist
communication.”
•
According to European Union, there are three categories of tourism:
1. Internal tourism, which comprises domestic tourism and inbound tourism;
2. National tourism, which comprises domestic tourism;
3. International tourism, which consists of inbound tourism and outbound tourism.
Therefore, according to the category of tourism, the language naturally changes due to the
addressees.

According to text types, texts are split into four:

1. Narrative texts,
2. Expository texts,
3. Argumentative texts.
4. Descriptive texts,

In terms of this division tourism brochures can be said to be both descriptive and expository, since
they give information about the places to be seen with descriptions.


Associate Prof. Dr., University Of Salento Lecce/Italy, Ondokuz Mayıs University Samsun/Turkey,
[email protected]

166
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

2.00 PURPOSE OF THE STUDY

This study aims at

• studying the language of tourism brochures through a stylistic analysis and
discourse analysis,
• comparing Turkish and English versions of brochures in terms of the linguistic analysis.

3.00 RESEARCH QUESTIONS

This study discusses the following questions:

1. Is the vocabulary simple or complex?
2. Is the vocabulary descriptive or evaluative, general or specific?
3. Are adjectives frequent? To what kinds of attribute do adjectives refer? Physical?
Psychological? Visual? Auditory? Colour? Referential? Emotive? Evaluative? Etc.
4. Do verbs carry an important part of the meaning?
5. Are adverbs frequent?
6. Do the texts contain idiomatic expressions?
7. What kind of grammatical categories are used in texts?
8. To what extent are grammaticality and intentionality related?
9. Is there foregrounding?
10. What is the type of the texts?
11. How is cohesion and coherence accomplished in texts?

4.00 METHOD

In order to conduct this study, several tourism brochures (printed or online) each of which
represents one geographical region in Turkey with Turkish and English versions have been
scrutinized. Eight Turkish texts with their English translations have been extracted from the
brochures for the linguistic analysis. In the selection of the texts, three categories of the tourism
have been taken into account as well as the text types.
As a comparative language, English is taken, since it is a lingua franca assumed to be generally
spoken by the tourists for intercultural communication

5.00 DISCUSSION OF THE DATA

5.01 South Eastern Anatolian Region

5.01.1 Adıyaman

Güneydoğu Anadolu Bölgesi’nde yer alan Adıyaman’ın deniz seviyesinden yüksekliği 669
metredir. Doğusunda Diyarbakır, güneyinde Şanlıurfa ve Gaziantep, batısında Kahramanmaraş,
kuzeyinde ise Malatya illeri ile çevrilmiştir. Merkez ilçe ile birlikte 9 ilçesi bulunan ilin yüzölçümü
7.614 km²’dir.

5.01.2 Adıyaman

Adıyaman is a province located in the South-East Anatolian region. It is at an elevation of 669

metres above sea-level. It is surrounded by Diyarbakır to the east, Şanlıurfa and Gaziantep to the
South. Kahramanmaraş to the west and Malatya to the North. It has nine administrative districts,
including the central one, and extends over an area of 7,614 km².

167
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

A. Lexical Categories:

In both Turkish and English texts the vocabulary is simple, formal, descriptive and specific.
Referential meanings of the words have been used. Nouns are concrete. Proper nouns are used,
such as Adıyaman, Diyarbakır, Şanlıurfa, Gaziantep and Kahramanmaraş.
The adjectives are not frequent. The verbs are stative and not dynamic. There are not any
adverbs.

B. Grammatical Categories:

In both texts, declarative sentences are used. In the Turkish text, the sentences on the whole have a
complex structure; there is a notable occurence of anticipatory structure. Besides, relative clauses
are used whereas in the English text, there is only one complex sentence. Noun Phrases are
relatively suitable.
In the English text, Adjective Phrases are used. Prepositional Phrases are used in both texts.

C. Discourse:

In terms of foregrounding, there are formal and structural repetitions, such as parallelism in both
texts. In the Turkish text, cohesion, a logical link, between sentences is accomplished by
coordinating conjunction. In both texts, anaphoric referents are used. In the English text, there is an
exophoric referent (e.g.the central one). Coherence is established with appropriately used
anaphoric referents in both texts.

5.02.1 NEMRUT: Dev Heykeller Mekânı Nemrut

Adıyaman'ın Kâhta ilçesinde bulunan ve içinde Kommagene Krallığı'nın antik kentini barındıran
milli park içerisinde, aslan ve kartal heykellerinin arasında 7 metreye varan dev heykeller
bulunuyor. Bölge, tarih meraklıları için ideal.

5.02.2 NEMRUT: Place Of Giant Sculptures

Nemrut is an ideal place for history fans. It locates in Kahta town of Adıyaman. In this area there is
a national park which includes traces of Kingdom of Commagene an ancient civilization. There are
gravestones and giant sculptures of lion and eagle head in 7 meters height.
A. Lexical categories:

In both texts, the vocabulary is complex, formal, descriptive and specific. The nouns are concrete.
The adjectives are frequent. They are physical, evaluative and visual.
In English, the verbs carry an important part of the meaning. In both texts, the verbs are static;
they do not refer to movements. Adverbs are not used in the texts.

B. Grammatical Categories:
In both texts, declarative sentences are used. in the Turkish text, a minor sentence type with no
verbs is used. In the Turkish text, the sentences on the whole have a complex structure; there is a
notable occurence of anticipatory structure. In English compound sentences are used. In the
English text, there is one relative clause, whereas in the Turkish text, almost all the sentences are
formed with relative clauses.

168
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Adjective Phrases are used in both texts.

C. Discourse:

In English foregrounding is established through the anaphoric referents, such as it, this area.
In both texts, cohesion is established by coordinating conjunction “and”.
In the Turkish text, coherence in the title is established with a cataphoric referent, whereas in
English, it is anaphoric.
A special deviation, metaphor, as foregrounding has been used to attract the attention of the
reader to Nemrut through “Giant Sculptures”.

5.03 The Aegean Region

5.03.1 Antik Kente Gizemli Yolculuk

İzmir'in Selçuk ilçesi yakınlarındaki 4 bin yıllık Efes Antik Kenti, kiliseleri, çarşıları, mağaraları,
çeşmeleri ile en çok ilgi çeken turistik mekânlardan.

5.03.2 EPHESUS: A Mysterious Trip in Archaic City

This archaic city is near the Selçuk town of İzmir. It has a history for 4000 years. It is the most
attractive tourist place with its churches, bazaars, caves and founts. You should definitely visit this
city to be witness of history and to feel it.

A. Lexical categories:

In both texts, the vocabulary is complex, formal, descriptive and evaluative. The nouns are
concrete. The adjectives are frequent. They are visual, evaluative and attributive.
In the Turkish text, there are not any verbs. They are eliminated from the sentence.
In English text, the verbs are both stative and dynamic. (e.g. Visit)
Adverbs of degree have been used in both texts. In the English text, there is also a significant use
of sentence adverb, disjunct, “definitely”

B. Grammatical Categories:

In Turkish, minor sentence type has been used, since there is not a verb. In English, the sentences
have a simple structure. In Turkish, a dependent clause preceding the subject of a noun clause has
been used.
Adjective Phrases have been used in both texts.

C. Discourse:

In the English text, the external relation of the last part of the text gives a sense of social relation
between the writer and the reader.
It is a kind invitation for the tourists to visit Ephesus.
Both texts can be said to be cohesive and coherent. In the title of the Turkish text, the “city” is
exophoric, whereas it is anaphoric in the English text. Therefore, it gives an effect of reinforcement
for the tourists to visit this area.

169
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

5.04 The Mediterranean Region

5.04.1 HATAY: Nasıl Gidilir?

Çeşitli illerden şehirlerarası otobüslerle karayolundan gidilebilir. Ayrıca Havayolu ile de şehre
ulaşılabilir. İskenderun’da bulunan gar ve limandan da denizyolu ve demiryolu ile ulaşmak
mümkündür.

5.04.2 HATAY: Transportation

Hatay is easily accessible from all parts of Turkey by car or buses. It is also possible to reach Hatay
by sea or railway transport. There is a railway station and a harbour in İskenderun.

A. Lexical categories:

In both texts, the vocabulary is both simple and complex; formal and evaluative. The nouns are
concrete.
In English text, the adjectives are predicative, whereas in the Turkish text, they are both
attributive and predicative.
The verbs are dynamic in Turkish text, whereas in English text, they are static through linking
verbs. In Turkish text, there are not any adverbs, but in English text, to intensify the degree of
adjectives, the adverbs have been used.

B. Grammatical Categories:

In both texts, the declarative and simple sentences are used. In the Turkish text, the tittle is
interrogative, “Nasıl Gidilir?”,
whereas in English text it is presented with a noun “transportation” to attract the tourists’ attention
directly to the aim.

C. Discourse:

There are cases of structural repetition in both texts. Cohesion is established through conjunctions,
“with, or, by, and”. In the English text, there are no referents, whereas in Turkish there is only one
anaphoric referent.

5.05 THE BLACK SEA REGION

5.05.1 SAMSUN: Konaklama

Turistik işletme belgeli ve Belediye belgeli olmak üzere, Samsun’da her bütçeye uygun birçok
konaklama tesisi mevcut. Bunların bazıları normal otel statüsündeyken bazıları iki ya da üç yıldıza
sahip otellerden oluşur.

5.05.2 SAMSUN: Accommodation

A variety of accommodation facilities is available in Samsun, some carrying the national certificate
for tourism enterprises and some licensed by the local municipality, catering to different needs and
budgets. Some hotels have two-star or three star ratings, while many unrated enterprises provide an
economical but valuable service.

170
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

A. Lexical categories:

In both texts, the vocabulary is both simple and complex; the complex nouns are more in number.
They are formal and descriptive. The nouns are concrete.
In the Turkish text, the adjectives are referential, whereas they are evaluative in the English text.
The verbs are static in both texts and there are not any adverbs.

B. Grammatical Categories:

In both texts, there are both compound complex sentence structures. The sentence complexity has
been established through coordination, subordination and parataxis.

C. Discourse:

In the Turkish text, the cataphoric referents have been used, while in English, anaphoric referents
have been used.
In the English text, a structural repetition is seen through parallelism of the use of “some.” In the
Turkish text, opposition is used instead.

5.06 THE MARMARA REGION

5.06.1 İstanbul

İmparatorluklar başkenti…kıtalara hükmeden kent…medeniyetlerin beşiği…kültürlerin,

uygarlıkların, kıtaların buluşma noktası…İstanbul için söylenebilecek binlerce sözden
yapılabilecek binlerce tanımlardan sadece birkaçı. İstanbul’u anlatmak için kelimelerin yetersiz
kalması gibi sadece hakkında yazılanları okumak, anlatılanları dinlemek de İstanbul’u tanımanıza
yetmez. Tarih kokan sokaklarını adım adım dolaşır, dünya üzerindeki en büyük imparatorluklardan
olan Bizans ve Osmanlı’nın mirası eserleri yerinde görür, eşsiz konumunun sunduğu manzaraları,
her köşesine saklanmış gizemleriyle tüm güzellikleri kendiniz keşfederseniz tanımaya başlarsınız
İstanbul’u ve tanıdıkça da aşık olursunuz.

5.06.2 İstanbul

The capital of empires… the city that dominated continents… the cradle of civilasation…the
meeting point of cultures and civilizations…These are some of the thousands of phrases that
describe İstanbul. Yet neither words nor any amount of reading or listening are sufficient to truly
describe and become familiar with the city. Only when you walk along its historic streets, when
you see with your own eyes the architectural masterpieces of Byzantine and Ottoman Empires in
their original setting, when you enjoy the panoramic vistas of its location, and when you start to
explore its mystical beauties- only then will you begin to discover, and to fall in love with
İstanbul…

A. Lexical categories:

In both texts, the vocabulary is complex, formal, descriptive, evaluative and emotive. The nouns
are both concrete and absract. The adjectives are frequent. They are physical (architectural),
visual (panoramic), referential (familiar) and evaluative (mystical). Besides, In the Turkish text,
an gradable adjective, (the biggest) has been used.

171
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

In both texts, the verbs are stative and dynamic. Additionally, the adverbs are frequent. There is a
significant use of the adverb “only” to attract the tourists’ attention.

B. Grammatical Categories:

The Noun Phrases have been used at the beginning of each text instead of full sentences. The
compound complex sentences have been used.
In the Turkish text, the conjunction “and” is only used, whereas in English, “yet” and “only
then” are also used.

C. Discourse:

In theTurkish text, as a foregrounding, the phonological scheme, alliteration of “[k]” and “[ş]”
are used to take the attention of tourist readers to the slogans:
“İmparatorluklar başkenti…kıtalara hükmeden kent…medeniyetlerin beşiği…kültürlerin,
uygarlıkların, kıtaların buluşma noktası.”
whereas in English, “[k]”, “[ş]” and “[s]” are used to take the attention of tourist readers to the
slogans:
“The capital of empires… the city that dominated continents… the cradle of
civilasation…the meeting point of cultures and civilizations”…
In both texts the cataphoric referents have been used for “İSTANBUL” to emphasize the city.
Besides, in both texts, a metaphor has been used, such as “the cradle of civilazation”.

5.07 The Central Anatolian Region

5.07.1 Kapadokya Yürüyüş Yolu: Keyifli Tavsiyeler

Doğa harikası Kapadokya bölgesinin eşsiz manzarası ve peribacalarının arasında Atlı yürüyüş, jeep
safari, ATV (4 tekerlekli tek kişilik araç), scoter, bisiklet turları yaparak, isterseniz de muhteşem
Kapadokya manzarasını yüksekten balon turu ile süsleyebilirsiniz. Günün yorgunluğunu Türk
gecelerinde Sema gösterileri, Halk oyunlarının örneklerini izleyerek ya da Kaya
disco barlarda bölgenin güzel şaraplarını tadarak atabilirsiniz.

5.07.2 Trekking in Cappadocia: Pleasant Advice

In the wonderful landscape of Cappadocia among fairy chimneys, you might do a tour on
horseback, a jeep safari, a ride on the ATV (a 4 wheel cart for only one person), a scooter or
bicycle… or you could enjoy the wonderful landscape of Cappadocia by a balloon tour. Finally,
you can get rid of the fatigue of the day watching the performances of the dervishes, Turkish folk
dances in the evenings or sipping excellent local wine in a Rocky disco bar.

A. Lexical categories:

Simple, complex, formal, specific, descriptive and evaluative vocabulary has been used in both
texts.
“Yorgunluk atmak” “get rid of fatigue” is an idiomatic expression in the texts.

Both concrete and abstract nouns are used. In the Turkish text, several adjectives have been used,
whereas in the English text only two adjectives, such as “wonderful” and “excellent” have been
used.

172
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

In the Turkish and English texts, the physical adjective, “rocky”, referential, “ATV” and
evaluative “excellent” have been used.

In the English text, the adverb “finally” has been used as a conjunction. The verbs are dynamic.

B. Grammatical Categories:

In the Turkish text, compound complex sentences have been used with “and” and “or”, while in
the English text, only “or” has been used in order to present several alternatives to the tourist
readers.
The title in Turkish has been presented by a Noun Phrase, whereas in English text, it is given
through a Prepositional Phrase.

C. Discourse:

In both texts, cataphoric referents have been used for Cappadocia as a foregrounding. Through the
use of the exophoric referent, “you” in both texts, the tourist readers have been invited implicitly to
Cappadocia.

5.08 Eastern Anatoian Region

5.08.1 Van Gölü’nde Günbatımı

Van kültürel birikimi ve doğal güzellikleri, yöresel dokusuyla Anadolu'nun motiflerini yaşatabilen
bir kent. Türkiye'nin en büyük gölü bu ilimizde. Van Gölü üç de ada barındırıyor: Bu adalardan en
meşhuru Akdamar

5.08.2 The Van Lake:The Sundown in Van Lake

Van can get motifs of Anatolia alive with its cultural accumulation and scenic beauties. The biggest
lake of Turkey, which harbour three islands, is in this city. Akdamar is the famous one among these
islands. There is also a historic castle in this island.

A. Lexical categories:

In both texts, the vocabulary is simple, complex, formal, descriptive and evaluative. The nouns
are both concrete and abstract. The Proper names, “Van” and “Akdamar” have been used to take
the tourist readers’ attention to the environment of Van implicitly.
The adjectives are frequent. They are physical, referential and evaluative. Besides, a gradable
adjective has been used in the Turkish text. Additionally, in the Turkish text, there is only one verb
which refers to a state, which is a transitive one. In the other sentences, the verbs are deleted.

B. Grammatical Categories:

In both texts, declarative sentences have been used. In the Turkish text, minor sentence types
have been presented. On the contrary, in the English text, the simple, complex and compound
complex sentences have been used.

173
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

C. Discourse:

In order to attract the attention of the tourist readers to the Lake Van, the archaic word,
“sundown” has been used instead of “sunset”. Therefore, the tourists are implicitly exposed to the
ancient motifs of Anatolia.
In both texts, anaphoric referents have been used. Cohesion is established well; but coherence is
violated through the tittle on purpose. It is because the title is nothing to do with the content.
Taking this foregrounding, deviation, into account, it can be said that the tourist readers are
deliberately invited to visit the Lake Van to see its environment, as well.

6.00 CONCLUSION

6.01 Concluding Remarks:

In conclusion, this study points out that the brochures as tourist-information texts have a language
of tourism with some specialized vocabulary, and grammatical rules in an appropriately given
discourse of two cultures, Turkish and English. As is seen in both languages, intentionality has
shaped grammaticality. “Tourism is a specialized field and the language of tourism is, therefore, a
specialized language” (Francesconi 2010: 20).

In order to accomplish this specialized language, it should be borne in mind that implicitly there is
a social relation between the writer and the tourist readers.
The linguistic analysis of the texts shows that almost all types of adjectives have been used in both
languages. Generally speaking, in the English texts, the adjectives are predicative, whereas in the
Turkish texts, they are both attributive and predicative.

According to the referential meaning of two cultures, different vocabulary items have been used.
According to the text types, the type of vocabulary changes; descriptive and specific vocabulary
has been used in descriptive texts, whereas evaluative and specific vocabulary has been used in
expository texts. In the Turkish expository texts, minor sentence type has been used, since the verbs
are deleted. Therefore, through verbs, foregrounding is established to carry an important part of the
meaning.
In order not to lead misunderstanding, in the English texts idiomatic expressions have been
avoided. Foregrounding has been given importance in order to attract the tourist readers’ attention.
All the linguistic elements have been presented through a well designed discourse.

6.02 Suggestions:

1. The Language of Tourism texts should be given importance;

2. Due to cultural diversity between languages, the translation of the source language into
the target language should be done cautiously in tourist-information texts;
3. In the translation departments of the faculties some linguistic courses on tourism should
be offered in order to train prospective translators for the field of Tourism;
4. The Tourism sector can be improved, conducting some Corpus studies.

174
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

REFERENCES

Brown Gillian and George Yule. 1983. Discourse Analysis. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press.

Chatman, Seymour. 1970. Introduction in Literary Style. A Symposium. London: OUP.

ix-xv.

Francesconi, Sabrina. 2010. English for Tourism Promotion: Italy in British Tourism
Texts. Milano: Ulrico Hoepli Milano.

Halliday, M.A.K. 1975. Learning How to Mean- Explorations in the Development of

Language. London: Edward Arnold.

Some Tourism Brochures in Turkish and English published by Republic of Turkey,

Ministry of Culture and Tourism.

175
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”
November 15-17, 2012 SAMSUN

THE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN STUDENTS’ USE OF READING STRATEGIES AND

READING ACHIEVEMENT

Yusuf ŞEN* Mesut KULELİ

Abstract

The aim of this study is to determine the relationship between students’ use of reading strategies and
their reading achievement in English. To this end, the Survey of Reading Strategies questionnaire developed
by Mokhtari and Sheorey (2002) has been adapted into Turkish and administered to 114 students studying in
the English Preparatory program in the School of Foreign Languages at Duzce University in 2011-2012
Academic year. In the analysis of the results, frequency and percentage statistics, independent sample t-test
and correlation coefficient statistics have been used. While 66 participants (57,9%) were male, 48 of them
were female (42,1%). Of the 114 participants, 40 of them (35,1%) passed prep class at the end of the
academic year while 74 of them (64,9%) failed. In order to relate the results of the questionnaire to those
students’ reading achievement, at the end of the academic year, those participants’ reading quiz and exam
scores were obtained, and the average score resulting from those quizzes and midterms was taken as those
participants’ reading achievement scores. Because this is not an experimental study but rather a descriptive
study, it was needless to administer a reading test to the students. The results of the study show that students
use technical aids strategies and coherence detection strategies often; however, they use monitoring strategies
sometimes. Taking the whole questionnaire as a whole, students often make use of reading strategies. There
is significant difference between the students who passed prep program and those who failed the prep
program in terms of their use of coherence-detection strategies, favoring the pass group. Further, there is
significant relationship between students’ use of technical aids strategies as well as use of reading strategies
in general and their reading achievement.

Key Words: Reading strategies, Reading achievement, English

1. INTRODUCTION

In acquiring a language, reading is of vital importance as a skill because it is both a means

to exposing students to new vocabulary items and providing them with comprehensible input so
that they could be aware of the dynamics of the foreign language. While some consider productive
skills to be the ultimate point of language acquisition, it is beyond doubt that receptive skills are the
first step in this long path and such receptive skills as reading skill pave the way for appropriate
development of productive skills like writing.

While reading in a foreign language, students make use of certain strategies in order to
comprehend the text better. Students do not only read the words written on the page with a view to
getting a general understanding of the passage but they also benefit from certain techniques that
will help them comprehend the passage better and draw conclusions more easily. It is generally
when students cannot understand a certain part of a text that they resort to reading strategies;
however related literature shows that both good readers and poor readers make use of reading
strategies. Much research has been carried out on learning strategies and reading strategies and
strategy use habits of students. According to Scarcella and Oxford (1992, p. 63), learning strategies
are “specific actions, behaviors, steps or techniques --such as seeking out conversation partners, or

*
Asst. Prof. Dr., Duzce University, School of Foreign Languages [email protected]

Lecturer, Duzce University, School of Foreign Languages [email protected]

176
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

giving oneself encouragement to tackle a difficult language task -- used by students to enhance
their own learning”. From this definition, two aspects of learning strategies can be highlighted:
tackling a difficult language task and enhancing their own learning. Therefore, it is safe to conclude
that reading strategies are not only for problem solving, but also for enhancing our comprehension
level. To put learning strategies in another way, O’Malley and Chamot (1990) define learning
strategies as “the special thoughts or behaviors that individuals use to help them comprehend, learn,
or retain new information.” It can be inferred from this definition that learning strategies are not
only for comprehension but also for retention of new information. Therefore, it is hardly surprising
that strategies are used both by poor learners and good learners.

Narrowing the focus from the general perspective of learning strategies to a more specific
kind of strategy; that is, reading strategies, it is possible to come up with more specific definitions
of strategy. As Barnett (1988, p. 150) puts it, reading strategies are “mental operations involved
when readers approach a text effectively and make sense of what they read.” As opposed to
learning strategies, this definition does not contain any reference to retention and it only deals with
the moment of reading and coping with the text. It is out of the question that all readers employ
certain tactics and techniques while reading both in L1 and L2, but those techniques and tactics are
general and are not tailored to a specific condition. There is no single technique which allows
readers to minimize the obstacles in comprehension and contributes to overall reading efficiency.
This gap can only be filled through certain case-specific reading behaviors called reading
strategies. In a sense, reading strategies are “tactics that readers use deliberately when routine
techniques are inadequate to resolve a given interpretation” (Anderson, 1991; Carrell, 1998; Paris
et al., 1991). As can be seen from this definition, reading strategies make up for the deficiency left
by general tactics and enable the reader to go beyond what he already uses in similar situations.

1.1.1. Classification of Learning Strategies

Seeing that reading strategies play a big role in comprehending and interpreting a text
and that there isn’t a miraculous strategy or tactic which ensures perfect comprehension in all cases
and in all learners, it is inevitable that there are many of them. As a rule, when there is too many of
something, there begins a classification process so that they can be handled more effectively and
more general characteristics can be attributed to them. The same tendency was followed in reading
strategies and many different researchers have come up with their own classification systems.

One of the most commonly accepted classifications of reading strategies was by Young and
Oxford (1997). They divided reading strategies into two general groups as global reading strategies
and local reading strategies. Global reading strategies involve such strategies as integrating
information, recognizing text structure, using background knowledge and anticipating content.
These strategies are more about the readers’ holistic approach to texts, without going into depth
like words or phrases. Local reading strategies, on the other hand, involve strategies like translating
a word or a phrase, paraphrasing, and breaking lexical items into parts. The latter group has more to
do with the structure and meaning of the forms used in the text, and the strategies in that group do
not lead to an overall understanding or interpretation of the text, but rather makes small bits of
content more comprehensible.

Another equally well-known classification of reading strategies is by Sarig (1987) on

which reading strategy classification is based in this study. Sarig divides reading strategies into
four different groups. The first group of strategies like skimming, scanning, marking the text,
making a summary, using glossary, recognizing cognates, examining illustrations, using context to
define word are classified under Technical Aids. These strategies are mostly outside resources to
help in comprehension and help the reader to compensate for lack of knowledge in foreign
language. In the second group, syntactic simplification, producing synonyms, using paraphrase,

177
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

identifying grammatical category of words, interpreting the text, using inference and adding of
information together make up Clarification and Simplification strategies. The readers dealing with
the small parts of the text to understand every sentence tend to benefit from those strategies. In the
third group, Sarig categorizes identifying the macroframe, keeping the meaning of the passage in
mind, using information about story, using general knowledge, using background knowledge,
identifying key information, anticipating content, hypothesizing, recognizing text structure and
integrating information strategies under Coherence Detection strategies. These strategies fall into
global reading strategies in Young and Oxford’s classification system (1997) and enable the reader
to approach the text from a wider perspective. The last group of reading strategies include
consciously changing the plan, holding, varying the reading rate, rereading, identifying
misunderstandings, correcting mistakes, skipping in a controlled fashion, self-directed dialogue,
evaluating guesses, following through with a solution to problem, questioning information in the
text, monitoring comprehension, reacting to text and questioning the meaning of sentence or word
and are categorized under Monitoring strategies. With this group of strategies, the reader checks his
own understanding of the text and this last group is most prone to vary from person to person due
to its user specific quality.

Block (1986) was engaged in another classification system of reading strategies but only of
those employed by poor readers. According to Block, poor readers use some general and local
reading strategies. General reading strategies used by poor readers are: anticipating content,
recognizing text structure, integrating information, questioning information, distinguishing main
ideas, interpreting the text, using general knowledge and associations to background, commenting
on behavior or process, monitoring comprehension, correcting behavior, focusing on textual
meaning as a whole and reacting to the text. Local reading strategies are: paraphrasing, rereading,
questioning meaning of a clause or sentence, questioning meaning of a word and solving a
vocabulary problem.

While Block (1986) only categorizes the reading strategies employed by poor readers,
Hosenfeld determines the reading strategies employed successful readers. Even though Hosenfeld
doesn’t classify reading strategies as the others do, he provides a detailed list of the reading
strategies of successful readers, so his work is of importance for providing an insight into the
strategies that might make a difference in students’ achievement levels. Hosenfeld (1984)
determines successful readers’ strategies as follows:

• Keeping the meaning of the passage in mind

• Reading in broad phases
• Skipping inessential words
• Guessing from context the meaning of unknown words
• Identifying the grammar category of words
• Demonstrating sensitivity to a different word order
• Examining illustrations
• Reading the title and making inferences from it
• Referring to the side gloss
• Using the glossary as a last resort
• Looking up words correctly
• Continuing if unsuccessful at decoding word or phrase
• Recognizing cognates
• Evaluating their guesses
• Using their knowledge of the world

178
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

While there are many different classifications of reading strategies, the ones provided in
this section provide the most clear and the most systematic of all. In this study, the classification
system of Sarig (1987) has been adopted and it has been adapted as a result of factor analysis.

1.1.2. METHODOLOGY

Relevant data was collected in the Spring Semester of 2011-2012 Academic year.

2.1. Data Collection Tool

Data was collected through a questionnaire and average score of the four reading quizzes
and one midterm in that Spring Semester.

2.1.1. Survey of Reading Strategies

The questionnaire for obtaining data about students’ reading strategy use was adapted from
Mokhtari and Sheorey’s Survey of Reading Strategies (2002). The original questionnaire includes
30 items and it consists of three sub-factors. Mokhtari and Sheorey categorized reading strategies
under Global Reading Strategies, Problem Solving Strategies and Support Reading Strategies. The
questionnaire was translated into Turkish so that the participants could better understand the items.
Content validity and construct validity were checked by the researchers. The questionnaire was
administered to 136 students to check its reliability. As a result of factor analysis through SPSS
16.0, 16 items were deleted from the questionnaire because 11 of them were categorized under
more than one factor; 4 items were deleted because they reduced the factor validity of the
questionnaire and 1 item was deleted because it was the only item in its category. As a result, the
adapted questionnaire consists of 14 items and these 14 items are categorized under 3 components.
Initial eigenvalues for the components are as follows:

Component 1: 3,713
Component 2: 1,522
Component 3: 1,352
Total Variance Explained: 64,156

Classification and naming system of the questionnaire is based on Sarig’s classification

(1987). The first component is classified as Technical Aids Strategies and it consists of 6 items.
The strategies in this component are mostly concerned with extra materials the reader makes use of
when he comes across certain difficulties in comprehension and certain simple techniques to help
him remember the basic information later on. The items included in this component are as follows:

I take notes while reading to help me understand what I read.

I underline or circle information in the text to help me remember it.
I use reference materials (e.g. a dictionary) to help me understand what I read.
When text becomes difficult, I re-read it to increase my understanding.
When I read, I guess the meaning of unknown words or phrases.

When reading, I translate from English into my native language.

179
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

The second component is classified as Monitoring strategies. There are 6 strategies under
this category. These strategies help the reader check his own comprehension while reading. As the
reader reads the text, he asks himself questions and ponders on the things he has read. In a way, the
reader literally monitors himself as he reads. The items included in this component are as follows:

I have a purpose in mind when I read.

When text becomes difficult, I read aloud to help me understand what I read.
I think about whether the content of the text fits my reading purpose.
I adjust my reading speed according to what I am reading.
I ask myself questions I like to have answered in the text.
I check to see if my guesses about the text are right or wrong.

The third component is classified as coherence detection strategies. These strategies are
about the reader’s reading habits. There are two items under this category and the items included in
this component are as follows:

I try to get back on track when I lose concentration.

I stop from time to time and think about what I am reading.

After the factor analysis, reliability check of the questionnaire was conducted through
SPSS 16.0. With its new design, this 14-item- Likert Type questionnaire was found to be reliable
with the Cronbach’s Alpha value .771.

Table 2.1 Reliability of the questionnaire

Cronbach’s Alpha N of Items
,771 14

When the Cronbach’s Alpha value is above the critical point of .70 a questionnaire is
considered to be a reliable one and this is the case in this questionnaire, which means that it can be
administered to the participant group of the study in order to obtain data about their reading
strategy use.

2.1.2. Reading Achievement Scores

As this study is not an experimental one, it is needless to administer a reading performance

test to students. Students’ reading achievement scores have been obtained through 4 reading quiz
scores and a reading midterm score. Their average score is taken as the final achievement scores.

2.2. Participants

This study was conducted on 114 students. All the students were in the English prep
program in the School of Foreign Languages at Duzce University in 2011-2012 Spring Semester.
There were 19 classrooms in the school during that time and three of them were B level classes
while the rest 16 of them were A level students. The students in A classrooms were placed purely
randomly at the beginning of the Spring Semester and so the classrooms were heterogeneous. The
students in B classes, in contrast, were placed into those classes after a placement exam at the
beginning of the semester and so the classrooms were homogeneous. Each classroom consisted of
more or less 25 students and those students received 10 hours of Reading & Writing classes per

180
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

week. Of the 5 classrooms chosen randomly for this study, one was a B class while the rest four
were A classes, therefore students can be said to have been chosen purely randomly. Of the 114
students, 66 were male (57,9%) while 48 were female (42,1%).

Table 2.2 Participants according to their genders

Frequency Percent

Male 66 57,9
Female 48 42,1
Total 114 100

At the end of the year, 40 of those students (35, 1%) passed prep class while 74 failed the prep
class (64,9%) at the end of the academic year.

Table 2.3 Participants according to their pass / fail status at the end of the academic year
Frequency Percent

Pass 40 35,1

Fail 74 64,9

Total 114 100

2.3. Data Collection Procedure

The students who were given the 14-item questionnaire were asked to mark the best option
ranging from never to always in this Likert Type questionnaire. The students were also asked to
write down their full names and classrooms so that their reading achievement scores and their pass
or fail results could be obtained at the end of the semester. Students’ reading strategy use results
were analyzed through SPSS 16.0. Of the 6 Reading & Writing quizzes that they took during the
second semester, only 4 of them were calculated in finding their average score besides a midterm
due to the fact that those quizzes only tested the students’ reading achievement while the other two
also tested their vocabulary knowledge that they were supposed to learn from the course book
along with their writing and grammar knowledge.

3. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION

The research questions to which answers have been sought in this research concern the
extent to which students make use of reading strategies both as sub-components and in general as
well as the difference in terms of reading strategy use between those who have passed and those
who have failed the prep program. The last research question is the relationship between reading
strategy use and reading achievement.

3.1. To what extent do the students make use of reading strategies?

In order to determine the strategy use habits of students, descriptive statistics was used. As
a result of the descriptive statistics, 4.20-5.00 meant students always use reading strategies; 3.40 –
4.19 meant students often use reading strategies; 2,60-3,39 meant student sometimes use reading

181
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

strategies; 1,80-2,59 meant students rarely use reading strategies and 1.00-1,79 meant that students
never use reading strategies.

Table 3.1 Students’ use of Technical Aids Strategies

N Mean Std. Deviation
Technical aids strategy 114 3,6696 ,61487
Valid N (listwise) 114

According to Table 3.1, students’ Technical Aids Strategies mean is 3,66 and this means students
often make use of Technical Aids Strategies.

Table 3.2 Students’ use of Monitoring Strategies

N Mean Std. Deviation
Monitoring strategies 114 3,2266 ,63110
Valid N (listwise) 114

According to Table 3.2, students’ Monitoring Strategies mean is 3,22 and this means students
sometimes make use of Monitoring Strategies.

Table 3.3 Students’ use of Coherence Detection Strategies

N Mean Std. Deviation
Coherence detection
114 3,6974 ,82446
strategies
Valid N (listwise) 114

According to Table 3.3, students’ Coherence Detection Strategies mean is 3,69 and this means
students often make use of Coherence Detection Strategies.

Table 3.4 Students’ use of Reading Strategies as a whole

N Mean Std. Deviation
whole 114 3,4837 ,47017
Valid N (listwise) 114

According to Table 3,4, students’ general reading strategy use mean is 3,48 and this means students
often make use of Reading Strategies as a whole.

3.2. Is there a significant difference between students who passed prep class and those who
failed in terms of their use of reading strategies?

In order to determine whether there is significant difference between reading strategy use
of successful and unsuccessful students, strategy use tendencies of those who passed prep class and
those who failed prep class have been compared. Independent sample t-test was used in order to see
the difference between the two groups.

Table 3.5 Difference between successful and unsuccessful students in terms of their use
of Technical Aids Strategy
Result N Mean Std. Deviation p

182
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

Technical aids strategy Pass 40 3,6917 ,57926 ,77

Fail 74 3,6577 ,63683
p< ,05

According to Table 3.5, successful students’ mean is 3,69 while unsuccessful students’
mean is 3,65. Accordingly, now that p value is ,77 there is no significant difference between
successful and unsuccessful students in terms of their use of Technical Aids Strategy even though
there is a slight difference favoring successful students.

Table 3.6 Difference between successful and unsuccessful students in terms of their use
of Monitoring Strategies
Result N Mean Std. Deviation p
Monitoring strategies Pass 40 3,3042 ,52009 ,29
Fail 74 3,1847 ,68333
p< ,05

Taking Table 3,6 into consideration, successful students’ mean is 3,30 while unsuccessful
students’ mean is 3,18. Considering p value to be ,29, there is no significant difference between
successful and unsuccessful students in terms of their use of Monitoring Strategies even though
there is a slight difference favoring successful students.

3.7 Difference between successful and unsuccessful students in terms of their use of
Coherence Detection Strategies
Result N Mean Std. Deviation p
Coherence detection Pass 40 3,9625 ,68301 ,00*
strategies
Fail 74 3,5541 ,86233
p< ,05

According to Table 3.7, there is significant difference between successful and unsuccessful
students favoring successful students in terms of their use of Coherence Detection Strategies. This
is the only component in which there came out significant difference between successful and
unsuccessful students, therefore coherence detection strategies can be said to play a role in
determining one’s success levels in a foreign language.

3.8 Difference between successful and unsuccessful students in terms of their use of
reading strategies as a whole
Result N Mean Std. Deviation p
whole Pass 40 3,5643 ,42050 ,16
Fail 74 3,4402 ,49218
p< ,05

According to Table 3.8, successful students’ mean is 3,56 while unsuccessful students’
mean is 3,44. Even though there is a slight difference favoring the successful students, there is no
significant difference in terms of reading strategies as a whole. Taking all the statistics into

183
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

account, it may be possible to say that even though significant difference can be observed only in
Coherence Detection Strategies, successful students are always better users of all reading strategies
than unsuccessful students. These results are consistent with some other results in literature. In
contrast to successful readers, unsuccessful readers have limited knowledge about how to use
strategies effectively and spontaneously while reading. (Borkowski, Carr & Pressley; Swicegood &
Parsons as cited in Nolan, 1991)

3.3. Is there a significant correlation between strategy use and reading scores?

Because students’ scores are a combination of their Reading & Writing, Listening &
Speaking and Grammar scores, their general point average may not be a good predictor of their
reading strategy use. Therefore, students’ reading scores are correlated with their reading strategy
use in order to determine the effect of reading strategies on their reading achievement. To this end,
Pearson correlation was used on SPSS 16,0.

3.9 Correlation between students’ strategy use and their reading achievement
Technical Aids Monitoring Coherence detection General
r ,200(*) ,094 ,132 ,199(*)
p ,033 ,319 ,161 ,034
N 114 114 114 114
p< ,05

As can be inferred from Table 3.9, there is significant correlation between students’
reading achievement and technical aids strategies. However, there is no correlation between
monitoring strategies and reading achievement as well as between coherence detection strategies
and reading achievement. This is in stark conflict with Oxford et al’s (2004) finding that high-
proficiency level successful readers employ top-down strategies such as predicting, finding the
main idea and guessing the meaning of a word from the context, while poor readers rely on bottom-
up strategies more often. As is clear from the table, high proficiency level readers employ bottom-
up strategies, too and this makes difference in their reading achievement. General reading strategy
use of the students has also been found to be significantly in correlation with their reading
achievement. Anderson (1991) found that readers making use of more reading strategies usually
have better reading performances, but there is no set of reading strategies that determine reading
performance.

4. CONLUSION AND SUGGESTIONS

Students should be self-conscious of the reading strategies that they employ in reading
even though strategy use becomes an automatic response in reading as the level of the students
becomes higher. In order to raise students’ awareness of reading strategies, reading activities
should be designed in such a way that students can be made to use reading strategies. Students’
awareness of reading strategies, technical aids strategies, in particular should be raised because
technical aids strategies could contribute to reading achievement. Besides technical aids strategies
like dictionary use, note-taking should be encouraged in students as they are involved in reading
activities because it has also been shown to facilitate comprehension. Further, students should be
allowed to read a passage or some parts of the passage one more time if they feel the need to do so.
As the last point, formative exams and summative exams should be prepared in such a way that the
students can be made to benefit from reading strategies that they employ in reading activities when
in class as there is significant correlation between general reading strategy use and reading
achievement.

184
 The 3rd Black Sea ELT Conference “Technology: A Bridge to Language Learning”

REFERENCES

Anderson, N. (1991). Individual differences in strategy use in second language reading and testing.
Modern Language Journal

Barnett, M.A. (1988). Teaching reading strategies: how methodology affects language course
articulation. Foreign Language Annals.

Block, E. L. (1986). The comprehension strategies of second language readers. TESOL Quarterly,
20, 463–494.

McDonough, S. (1995). Strategy and Skill in Learning a Foreign Language. St. Martin’s Press.

Mokhtari, K., & Reichard, C. (2002). Assessing students' metacognitive awareness of reading
strategies. Journal of Educational Psychology

Nolan, T. E. (1991). Self-questioning and prediction: Combining metacognitive strategies. Journal

of Reading, 35(2), 132-138.

O'Malley, J.M. & Chamot, A.U. (1990). Learning Strategies in Second Language
Acquisition. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Oxford, R.L. (1990): Language Learning Strategies: What Every Teacher Should Know. Boston:
Heinle & Heinle.

Oxford, R., Cho, Y., Leung, S., & Kim, H-J. (2004). Effect of the presence and difficulty of task on
strategy use: An exploratory study. International Review of Applied Linguistics, 42, 1-47

Scarcella, R.C., & Oxford, R.L. (1992). The Tapestry of Language Learning: The Individual in the
Communicative Classroom. Boston: Heinle & Heinle

Young, D. J., & Oxford, R. (1997). A gender-related analysis of strategies used to process written
input in the native language and a foreign language. Applied Language Learning, 8, 43-73.

185
 ISBN
186 978-975-7636-99-1